breeam for communities: stage 2 communities/breeam_comm… · 2.3.2 interim certificate – outline...

©BRE Global 2008 The BREEAM name and logo are registered trademarks of the Building Research Establishment Ltd

The BREEAM Assessor Manuals are technical guidance documents which have been created to aid licensed BREEAM Assessors in carrying out BREEAM

Assessments.

BREEAM for Communities Assessor Manual: Development Planning Application Stage

Date of Issue: March 2011

BREEAM for Communities: Stage 2

SD5065 Technical Guidance Manual:

Version 1


Contents Technical Changes to the BREEAM Communities Technical Guidance Manual Page 5 1.0 Introduction Page 16

1.1 What is BREEAM? Page 17 1.2 What is BREEAM Communities? Page 18 1.3 Governance and Quality Standards Page 18 1.4 BREEAM Credibility Page 20

1.4.1 Technical Credibility Page 20 1.4.2 Robust Technical Standards Page 20 1.4.3 Commercial Credibility Page 20

1.5 The BREEAM Communities Manual Page 21 1.5.1 What is in the core BREEAM Communities Manual? Page 21 1.5.2 Using the BREEAM Communities Manual Page 21 1.5.3 Understanding the BREEAM Communities Manual Page 22 1.5.4 Minimum – Mandatory Requirements Page 24 1.5.5 Example of a BREEAM Communities Issue Page 26 1.5.6 Additional Credit Issues Page 29 1.5.7 National Assessment Framework Page 30

2.0 Scope Page 31 2.1 BREEAM Communities Page 31 2.2 BREEAM Communities Bespoke Page 31 2.3 BREEAM Communities Stages of Assessment Page 32

2.3.1 Registration of ‘Compliant Assessment Framework’ Page 32 2.3.2 Interim Certificate – Outline Planning Stage Page 32 2.3.3 Final Certificate – Detailed Planning Stage Page 33

2.4 The Sustainable Development Framework Page 35 2.4.1 The Structure Page 35 2.4.2 Compliant Assessment Methodologies Page 36 2.4.3 Compliant Assessment Frameworks Page 36 2.4.4 The Process Page 37

2.5 Type of projects that can be assessed and certified against the BREEAM Communities standard Page 38 2.5.1 Type of Buildings Page 38 2.5.2 Type of Developments Page 38 2.5.3 Size of Developments Page 38 2.5.4 Location of Developments Page 38

2.6 Definitions Page 39 2.7 How to use the BREEAM for Communities Assessment Tool filter Page 40

3.0 Scoring and Rating Page 41 3.1 BREEAM Communities rating benchmarks Page 42 3.2 BREEAM environmental section weightings Page 43 3.3 Additional Tradeable Credits Page 45 3.4 BREEAM credits for innovation Page 45

3.4.1 Eligibility Criteria for Innovation Credits Page 47


3.5 Process for calculating a BREEAM Communities rating Page 49 3.5.1 BREEAM Communities Outstanding Rating Page 51 3.5.2 Production of Case Study Page 51

Climate and Energy Page 52

CE1 – Flood Risk Assessment (Location) Page 53 CE2 – Surface Water Runoff Page 71 CE3 – Rainwater SUDS Page 84 CE4 – Heat Island Page 92 CE5 – Energy Efficiency Page 100 CE6 – Onsite Renewable(s) Page 112 CE7 – Future Renewable(s) Page 119 CE8 – Services Page 127 CE9 – Water Consumption Page 132 CE10 – Design Weather Resilience Page 143 CE11 – Sub / smart metering Page 149

Resources Page 155 RES 1 - Low Impact Page 156 RES 2 – Locally Sourced Materials Page 163 RES 3 – Road Construction Page 168 RES 4 – Composting Page 173 RES 5 – Groundwater Page 185 RES 6 – Land Remediation Page 194

Place Shaping Page 199

PS1 – Sequential Approach Page 200 PS2 – Land Reuse Page 208 PS3 – Building Reuse Page 212 PS4 – Landscaping Page 216 PS5 – Design and Access Page 224 PS6 – Green Areas Page 235 PS7 – Local Demographics Page 241 PS8 – Affordable Housing Page 250 PS9 – Secure by Design Page 256 PS10 – Active Frontages Page 263 PS11 – Defensible Spaces Page 271 PS12 – Local Vernacular Page 276 PS13 – Security Lighting Page 282 PS14 – Form of Development Page 288 PS15 – Form of Development – Pedestrian Movement Page 294

Transport & Movement Page 300 TRA 1 – Location / Capacity Page 301 TRA 2 – Availability / Frequency Page 308 TRA 3 – Facilities Page 316 TRA 4 – Local Amenities Page 323 TRA 5 – Network Page 330 TRA 6 – Facilities Page 336 TRA 7 – Car Clubs Page 344


TRA 8 – Flexible Parking Page 350 TRA 9 – Local Parking Page 355 TRA 10 – Home Zones Page 362 TRA 11 – Transport Assessment Page 367 TRA12 – Electric Vehicle Charging Points Page 372 TRA13 – Transport Impacts Page 378 TRA14 – Commercial LGV Plan Page 384

Community Page 389

COM1 – Inclusive Design Page 390 COM2 – Consultation Page 397 COM3 – Development User Guide Page 407 COM4 – Management and Operation Page 417

Ecology and Biodiversity Page 423 ECO1 – Ecological Survey Page 424 ECO2 – Biodiversity Action Plan Page 432 ECO3 – Native Flora Page 437 ECO4 – Wildlife Corridors Page 442

Business and Economy Page 448

BUS 1 – Business Priority Sectors Page 449 BUS 2 – Labour and Skills Page 456 BUS 3 – Employment Page 461 BUS 4 – New Business Page 467 BUS 5 – Investment Page 472

Buildings Page 477

BLD 1– Domestic Page 478 BLD 2– Non Domestic Page 483 BLD3 – Building Refurbishment Page 488

Innovation Credits Page 495 Innovation Credits Page 496

BREEAM for Communities v1

Introduction


Schedule of Changes to the Scheme Document

The table below details the changes / additions to each Credit of this BREEAM for Communities Manual, the table also outlines the issue number (and therefore date) the change came into effect. Where an Assessor / user has been using or referencing an issue of the BREEAM for Communities Manual that has subsequently been superseded, they may continue to use and reference that issue of the Scheme Document through to certification. Or alternatively, they may switch to the latest issue for the purposes of completing and certifying the development project. When submitting a certification report the BREEAM Communities Assessor is asked to stipulate in the report which issue of the Scheme Document they have used to complete the assessment of the building. If two different issues were used throughout the course of the assessment, reference the latest issue used.

Issue number Date of issue

1.0 1st March 2011

Key (Type of Change)

A Administrative change e.g. typo, re-wording of text, minor addition to the text.

C An addition / insertion, deletion or alteration to the scope, assessment criteria, Compliance Notes, evidence required or relevant definitions.

AG An addition / insertion, alteration or deletion to the additional guidance and supporting information / references.


Introduction


Issue ID / Section Type Change

Issue no.

Title / front cover

A BREEAM for Communities has been relabelled BREEAM for Communities Stage 2 as additional stages of the scheme will be developed in the coming year. This is also version 1.0. Any future revisions to this manual will be notified in a change to the version number. As such this Technical Guidance Manual should officially be referred to as BREEAM for Communities: Stage Two Version One. This manual supersedes all previous BREEAM for Communities Manuals.

1.0

Scope C It has been clarified that BREEAM for Communities will retain its existing regional structure and weighting.

1.0

Bespoke C The bespoke process has been streamlined and formalised outside of the core manual. Those interested in undertaking a bespoke assessment should refer to the Compliant Assessment Methodology Compliance Note or contact BRE Global ([email protected]).

1.0

Scoring and Rating System

C Only under exceptional circumstances will BRE Global review Minimum – Mandatory requirements. If assessors feel their project may not achieve a Minimum – Mandatory Credit they are recommended to contact BRE Global ([email protected]) or the BREEAM for Communities Scheme Manager.

BRE Global understand there may be variations between the final masterplan submitted for Certification and the project that progresses for planning. Where any potential differences in final documentation translate to a 5% difference in the final BREEAM for Communities Final Score the project MUST be resubmitted for assessment. Any instances where there are major discrepancies between the final certificate and final submission to a planning authority will result in the Final Certificate being revoked and the assessor’s license reviewed.

1.0

Minimum – Mandatory requirements

A ALL Minimum – Mandatory requirements are now accompanied by a shaded Assessment Criteria box. They have also been listed in the introduction to the Technical Guidance Manual.

1.0

Regional Applicability

A Further to removal of the Regional Structure of Governance, reference to specific Regional Sustainability Checklist questions have been removed in place of the weighting that is applied to each particular issue.

1.0

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:([email protected])


Introduction



Issue no.

CE1 C Minor changes have been made to tighten the wording within the manual. In addition, developments that are adjacent to a water body that poses a risk to flooding (estuaries / coastal locations) should make reference to the risk of storm surges within the FRA. Also, where building types are unknown covenants must be in place to ensure that subsequent buildings located on the site are not at risk of flooding.

1.0

CE2 A Third Credit Schedule of Evidence requirement corrected. 1.0

CE3 AG Additional Compliance Notes added. Altered Schedule of Evidence requirements for One Credit. The following has been added to the Assessment Criteria: Please Note: where there are regional differences in the Benchmark requirements these will overrule to core BREEAM for Communities Manual i.e. in the South West the Good Benchmark is a minimum of 50%, and the Best benchmark is set as 75%.

1.0

CE4 AG Clarification has been added to ensure that items A – G are not in priority order and the developer / designer can choose which features to incorporate within their masterplan. In addition the referenced standard for calculating solar reflectance has been superseded and not replaced. Assessors are advised to use the old standard at this time.

1.0

CE5 C References for BERR replaced with references to DECC. 1.0

CE6 C The percentage contribution of renewable technologies has been increased by 5% at each criteria. This credit now refers to ALL development scales, rather than just large.

1.0

CE7 C This credit has been made a tradeable credit rather than being a minimum-mandatory. Additional Compliance Notes added.

1.0


Introduction



Issue no.

CE8 C Scope of services has been expanded to incorporate any services that run through the public realm that it felt will cause unnecessary disruption if they require maintenance. Services also expanded to include Internet Service Providers. This credit now relates to small sites as well.

1.0

CE9 C Following consultation this Credit has been downgraded from a Minimum – Mandatory requirement to become a tradeable credit. The Credit has been rewritten to focus on development scale water efficiency, with targets at the building level.

1.0

CE10 AG This Credit has been removed from the assessment criteria. And has been replaced with CE10 Water Management - Sustainable Urban Drainage.

1.0

CE11 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against.

1.0

CE12 AG This Credit has been removed from the assessment criteria.

1.0


1.0


1.0


1.0


1.0


1.0

CE Numbering

A As a result of the above deletions and alterations, the following numbering now applies: CE10 is now Water Management - Sustainable Urban Drainage CE11 is now Sub / smart-metering.

COM1 A English Partnerships references replaced with the Homes and Community Agency. Please Note: English Partnerships has not been completely removed due to standards and documents still referencing EP.

1.0


Introduction



Issue no.

Reference to The Wheelchair Housing Design Guide has been clarified to apply to the 2nd Edition (2006).

COM2 N/A No changes 1.0

COM3 C This credit has been altered from a Minimum – Mandatory to become a tradeable credit.

1.0

COM4 N/A No changes 1.0

COM5 AG This Credit has been deleted and merged with PS12. 1.0

PS1 AG The credit criteria have been altered to reduce the awarding of credits for construction on Greenfield sites. Additional clarification has been provided for Greenfield sites. Please Note: Major Regeneration has been removed from the land classifications, and thus removed from the filter in the BREEAM Communities assessment tool. Major Regeneration projects must now be classified as Brownfield development. In addition the study to determine need has been clarified.

1.0

PS2 A Additional compliance notes added. 1.0

PS3 AG Benchmarks altered to reflect feedback. Additional compliance notes added.

1.0

PS4 AG Compliance note strengthened. Additional Guidance added where there are existing features on site. In addition credit relates to existing landscape features that should be preserved as a result of the development.

1.0

PS5 AG This credit now applies to all English regions. 2nd Credit requirements reworded. Local Authority Design Champion recognised as providing compliance. Local Authority Design Guides (where in existence) can be used to demonstrate compliance with the 3rd Credit.

1.0


Introduction



Issue no.

PS6 C Additional information provided on ANGSt. Additional information regarding location of green space and how this should be accessed has been added.

1.0

PS7 AG Additional compliance note on the type of affordable housing specified within the development. Additional compliance requirements for One Credit. References to RDA’s removed from compliance notes for relevant consultation bodies.

1.0

PS8 AG Schedule of evidence revised to remove requirement for detailed housing design.

1.0

PS9 AG Secure By Design replaced with correct term, ‘Secured By Design’. Additional compliance requirement to clearly mark buildings on the masterplan that meet, or will meet, Secured By Design standards.

1.0

PS10 AG Additional guidance note added: Please Note: where the relevant Local Authority has developed their own Design Guide with relation to Active Frontages, these will take precedent over the Urban Design Compendium. Where 100% of the development meets Grade B, one credit can be awarded. Additional link provided to the Urban Design Compendium.

1.0

PS11 AG Additional information provided as to the classification of Active Frontages and ‘Exposed Backs’. Additional clarification for outline / concept design: Please Note: where building types are unknown commitment must be made within the masterplan to the access points of these building(s).

1.0

PS12 AG This Credit has been removed. 1.0

PS13 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against. The Credit has been renamed.

1.0

PS14 AG This credit has been deleted. 1.0

PS15 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against.

1.0


Introduction



Issue no.


1.0


1.0


1.0

PS19 AG This Credit has been removed. 1.0

PS numbering

A As a result of the above deletions and alterations, the following numbering now applies: PS13 is now PS12. PS15 is now PS13. PS16 is now PS14. PS17 is now PS15. PS18 is now PS16.

1.0

Eco1 AG Compliance Note 3 has been clarified to reflect sites with ecological features that are protected will achieve one credit by default. Compliance Note 6 has been clarified to ensure that only the views of the ecologist can have any bearing over the outcome over any ecological features on site. Compliance Note 7 has also been removed following consultation with stakeholders, A suitably qualified ecologist is now a minimum requirement for all credits.

1.0

Eco2 AG Schedule of evidence strengthened to allow the landowner to confirm that there will be no loss of ecological value from the site. The additional information has been clarified to ensure ONLY a suitably qualified ecologist can make recommendations.

1.0

Eco3 AG One Credit Compliance Note 3 has been removed to clarify that the percentages reflect the level of native planting. Compliance notes stating ‘consultation with’ an ecologist has been removed. The requirements and demonstration of compliance is now through an ecologist report only.

1.0


Introduction



Issue no.

The third credit compliance requirements have been strengthened to incorporate: Reference is also made to resilient plant species and these are incorporated within the planting scheme / specification. Additional clarification added.

Eco4 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against.

1.0

Tra1 AG This now applies to all regions. Additional Compliance Notes added.

1.0

Tra2 AG Additional clarification added to Compliance Note 2. Also, BRE Global now adopt a ‘worst case scenario’ to transport nodes, rather than a best case. Additional information added to compliance note 3. This credit now applies to ALL regions.

1.0

Tra3 AG This credit now applies to medium and large developments.

1.0

Tra4 A Items B and C swapped to make the credit easier to read. Additional compliance notes for Safe Pedestrian Route have been added.

1.0

Tra5 A Slight rewording of additional information 1.0

Tra6 AG Parking must be provided in public spaces to demonstrate compliance with Two Credits.

1.0

Tra7 AG Additional compliance requirements for Three Credits. 1.0

Tra8 AG Car parking spaces must now be designed for flexible use, and not simply ‘designated’ for flexible use. Compliance Note reformatted.

1.0

Tra9 AG

Compliance with Tra2 for Three Credits is no longer required. Additional note where Local Authority Parking Standards are different to the core manual, these will supersede what is included.

1.0

Tra10 AG Compliance Notes reformatted. Also, compliance with Tra4 is no longer required to meet the requirements of this credit. Link to TRA1 is now

1.0


Introduction



Issue no.

required for ‘Best’ Criteria.

Tra11 AG Compliance requirements strengthened. 1.0

Tra12 AG Following guidance this credit has been removed from the assessment.

1.0

Tra13 AG This Credit has been removed and replaced with an additional electric car charging point credit.

1.0

Tra14 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against.

1.0

Tra15 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against. HGV altered to LGV.

1.0

Transport numbering

A As a result of the above deletions and alterations, the following numbering now applies: Tra12 is now Electric Vehicle Charging Points. Tra13 is now Tra12 (Transport Impacts). Tra14 is now Tra13 (Commercial LGV Plan).

Res1 AG This credit now only relates to virgin aggregate Requirement 2, for 3 credits in the schedule of evidence has been revised.

1.0

Res2 AG Following feedback we have changed the credit criteria from m2 to m3. This is to allow Quantity Surveyors to demonstrate compliance with the credit more easily. Compliance can also be demonstrated through the form of commitments from the developer and initial details of materials to be used. Additional clarification on MMC and whether it can be incorporated within the assessment.

1.0

Res3 AG Additional definition of Mass included in Compliance Note. Additional Evidence Requirements added. Link provided to WRAP guidance on recycled roads.

1.0

Res4 AG This credit has been re-written to focus on designing out waste and increasing recycling during the life cycle of the development. Additional guidance from WRAP on designing out waste.

1.0

Res5 AG This Credit has been deleted. 1.0


Introduction



Issue no.

Res6 AG Credit question reworded to remove 2km threshold for water extractions. Credit now applies to all potential water-borne pollution. Additional evidence required to include mitigation measures for potential for pollution during construction of the development. Additional clarity added for sites with no surface water within the 2km radius.

1.0



Res11 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against. It is now RES6.

1.0


1.0


1.0



Res Numbering

As a result of the above deletions and alterations, the following numbering now applies: Res6 is now Res5. Res11 is now Res6. Res12 is now Res7. Res13 is now Res8.

1.0

Bus1 AG Additional Assessment criteria added: Local Enterprise Partnerships recognised under the scheme.

1.0


Introduction



Issue no.

Please Note: Regional Economic Strategies have been retained but where these have been superceded by a Local Enterprise Partnership (or equivalent)

Bus2 AG This credit now only relates to large projects. 1.0

Bus3 AG Additional Compliance Notes added. 1.0

Bus4 A Minor changes. 1.0

Bus5 AG Additional guidance note added on LEP’s and their influence on local economic development.

1.0

Bus6 AG This Credit has been deleted. 1.0

Bus7 AG This Credit has been deleted. 1.0

Bld1 AG Additional clarification on how to assess sites where there is a range of Code Housing. Where developments are purely non-domestic, although this is a mandatory credit, it can be removed where there is no –domestic development.

1.0

Bld2 AG Additional clarification added in that BRE Global accept a worst case scenario in respect to non-domestic buildings. Additional clarification on the status of ‘equivalence’ to BREEAM.

1.0

Bld3 AG This is an additional Credit that sits outside the existing Regional Sustainability Checklist structure but which is available for projects to be assessed against. The Credit seeks to address sites that have existing buildings on site that are being incorporated as part of the new development.

1.0


Introduction


1.0 Introduction

1.1 What is BREEAM?

BREEAM (Building Research Establishment’s Environmental Assessment Method) is the world leading and most widely used environmental assessment method for buildings, with over 115,000 buildings certified and nearly 700,000 registered. It sets the standard for best practice in sustainable design and has become the de facto measure used to describe a building’s environmental performance. Credits are awarded in ten categories according to the assessed performance of the building against the assessment criteria. These credits are then added together to produce a single overall score on a scale of Pass, Good, Very Good, Excellent and Outstanding. The operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Sustainability Board, representing a wide cross-section of construction industry stakeholders.

Aims of BREEAM:

• To mitigate the impacts of buildings on the environment

• To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits

• To provide a credible environmental label for buildings

• To stimulate demand for sustainable buildings

Objectives of BREEAM:

• To provide market recognition to low environmental impact buildings

• To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in buildings

• To set criteria and standards surpassing those required by regulations and challenge the market to provide innovative solutions that minimise the environmental impact of buildings

• To raise the awareness of owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits of buildings with a reduced impact on the environment

• To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives


Introduction


1.2 What is BREEAM for Communities?

BREEAM for Communities is an independent, third party assessment and certification standard based on the established BREEAM methodology. It addresses key environmental, social and economic sustainability objectives and planning policy requirements that have an impact on proposed development projects within the built environment. Credits are awarded in eight categories according to their performance against defined sustainability objectives and planning policy requirements. These credits are then added together to produce a single overall score on a scale of Pass, Good, Very Good, Excellent and Outstanding. The operation of BREEAM for Communities is overseen by BRE Global with input from an independent Governing Board, representing a wide cross-section of construction industry stakeholders.

Aims of BREEAM for Communities:

• To mitigate the impacts of development projects within the built environment

• To enable development projects to be recognised according to their environmental, social and economic benefits to the local community

• To provide a credible and holistic environmental, social and economic sustainability label for development projects in the built environment

• To stimulate demand for sustainable development (and sustainable communities) within the built environment

• To ensure the delivery of sustainable communities within the built environment.

Objectives of BREEAM for Communities:

• To provide market recognition to sustainable development projects

• To ensure best practice is incorporated in sustainable development projects

• To set criteria and standards surpassing those required by regulations and challenge the market to provide innovative solutions that address the sustainability objectives of development projects through both the process developers adopt and the actual built form

• To raise the awareness of planners, developers, occupants, consultants and policy makers of the benefits of sustainable developments

• To provide an innovative model of shared ownership in sustainable communities.


Introduction


1.3 Governance and Quality Standards

The BRE Global Governing Board oversees BRE Global’s guides, publications, standards and certification schemes in the area of sustainability and the environment.

Current standards and schemes include the BREEAM family of schemes, EcoHomes, Environmental Profiles and ISO 14001. One of the main responsibilities of this Board is to ensure that standards, guides and the way BRE Global operates meet the needs of stakeholders. The Board meets three times a year to review these issues.

The Sustainability Board reports to the BRE Global Governing Body, which has an independent overview of all BRE Global's schemes and activities. Specific responsibilities of the Sustainability Board and other Boards include:

• advising on the need for new certification schemes, standards and publications, including updates to existing ones;

• advising BRE Global on relevant legislation and technical matters;

• promoting certification;

• advising on issues that may affect the reputation and integrity of BRE Global;

• approving certification schemes, standards, publications or approvals and reviewing outputs from Expert Groups and Working Groups;

• ensuring a balanced participation with no single interest predominating;

• providing comments and guidance, where appropriate, on methods of assessment and testing, to review the progress of assessments and advise on content of certificates, prior to publication; and

• reviewing and advising on complaints and appeals as requested.

The Governing Body represents a wide cross section of stakeholders from the construction industry including building owners and users, constructors, specialist sub-contractors, designers, insurers, regulators, materials and product Suppliers / Manufacturers as well as developers, financiers, and NGOs). The independent chairman (elected by the members) is Alan Taylor, Head of Business Continuity at Lend Lease.

BREEAM for Communities is also informed by a steering group. The steering group consists of industry stakeholders and interested parties. Anyone interested in becoming involved in this steering group should contact BRE Global: [email protected].



Introduction


ISO 9001

BRE Global has ISO 9001 certification for its BREEAM Buildings schemes and also for the assessment and certification of construction materials under the BREEAM LCA (Life Cycle Analysis) environmental profiles. The certification for the BREEAM schemes covers the operations relating to assessor training, licensing, quality management, and record keeping.

UKAS Accreditation

Assessors qualified to deliver the BREEAM schemes are also covered under a UKAS accredited competent persons scheme. In addition, the operations relating to the certification of the BREEAM schemes and the environmental profiles are also covered under UKAS accredited product certification schemes.

BREEAM for Communities

Scope of the Scheme


1.4 BREEAM Credibility

1.4.1 Technical Credibility

BREEAM is tried and tested, both in terms of its robust technical standards, its commercial delivery, and expert advice (based on scientific evidence) which continues to inform almost every issue in BREEAM.

In the UK there are over 115,000 buildings certified and over 700,000 homes and buildings currently registered for assessment. BREEAM can be used to assess any building type anywhere in the world.

1.4.2 Robust Technical Standards

BREEAM has always used objective criteria to recognise good environmental performance:

• Issues for assessment are agreed to be significant, and offer worthwhile reductions on environmental and sustainability impacts.

• Issues must be assessable at the relevant stage in the project’s life.

• Performance levels are based on scientific evidence wherever possible.

• Performance levels must exceed demands of law and regulations and encourage innovation.

• Improvements encouraged by BREEAM are achievable and cost effective.

Where specific targets cannot be set using hard science or research, sensible practical measures are recommended to minimise environmental, social and economic impacts and enhance the overall quality of the development.

1.4.3 Commercial Credibility

Assessments are undertaken by organisations and trained individuals (licensed by BRE Global). This ensures:

• Competition in the market for assessment services

• Engagement with the whole of the industry

• Assessors work to the same quality standards (monitored by BRE Global).

BRE Global has gained UKAS (United Kingdom Accreditation Service) accreditation for all its BREEAM schemes. This means that its management of BREEAM is monitored and overseen by UKAS.


Scope of the Scheme


1.5 The BREEAM for Communities Manual

The BREEAM for Communities scheme Technical Guidance Manual is available to download from the BREEAM website (www.breeam.org/communities).

1.5.1 What is in the core BREEAM for Communities Manual?

• A definition of the scope of the BREEAM for Communities scheme

• Full information on the technical standards and criteria of the BREEAM for Communities scheme (summarised below)

• Rating & scoring information

• References to regional sustainability checklists.

1.5.2 Using the BREEAM for Communities Manual

BREEAM Assessor Manuals are technical guidance documents which have been created to aid licensed BREEAM Assessors in carrying out Assessments. Please note that the manuals and the information detailed therein has been designed for, and to be used by trained and licensed BREEAM Assessors only.

The core BREEAM for Communities Assessor Manual is ‘freely’ available as a complete document on the BREEAM website (www.breeam.org/communities) and the BREEAM for Communities Extranet. Individual technical guidance issues for each category are directly linked to the BREEAM for Communities Assessment Tool – only qualified BREEAM for Communities assessors have access to the Assessment Tool and the additional technical guidance issues.

Please Note that this BREEAM for Communities Technical Guidance Manual relates only to Stage 2 of the BREEAM for Communities Assessment process and as such can only be used to assess projects relevant to this phase.

This manual is to be used in conjunction with the BREEAM for Communities Assessment tool, available for download from the BREEAM Extranet: www.breeam.org/page.jsp?id=155.

Note: This document can only be used by non-assessors for reference (in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of use).

http://www.breeam.org/communities

http://www.breeam.org/communities

http://www.breeam.org/page.jsp?id=155


Scope of the Scheme


1.5.3 Understanding the BREEAM for Communities Manual

The BREEAM for Communities certification standard covers the following eight categories:

• Climate and Energy: addresses built form mitigation and adaptation issues;

• Place Shaping: addresses local area design and layout;

• Community: addresses consultation and local community involvement;

• Ecology: addresses protection of the ecological value of the site;

• Transport: addresses sustainable transport options;

• Resources: addresses sustainable use of resources;

• Business: addresses local and regional economic issues;

• Buildings: addresses overall sustainability performance of buildings.

Each category is detailed in this technical manual and consists of a number of issues (summarised below). Each issue seeks to mitigate the environmental, social and economic impact of a development project by defining a performance target and assessment criteria that must be met to confirm the target has been achieved. Where a performance target has been achieved the number of available BREEAM credits can be awarded.

Table 1: summary of BREEAM for Communities categories and main issues

Category Description Issues Covered

Climate and Energy

Reducing the proposed project’s contribution to climate change whilst ensuring that developments are appropriately adapted to the impacts of present and future climate change.

• Flood Management

• Energy and Water Efficiency

• Renewable Energy

• Infrastructure

• Passive Design Principles

Resources

Designing for the efficient use of resources including water, materials and waste in construction, operation and demolition, and minimising the life cycle impacts of materials chosen.

• Land Use and Remediation

• Material Selection

• Waste Management

• Construction Management

• Modern Methods of


Scope of the Scheme


Construction

Transport

Addressing how people can get to the facilities and locations that they need; giving people choices other than private cars and encouraging walking and cycling for healthier lifestyles.

• Walkable Neighbourhoods

• Cycle Networks

• Provision of Public Transport

• Green Travel Plans

• Construction Transport

Ecology

Conserving the ecology living on and visiting the site and taking full opportunity for ecological enhancement within and around the development as well as on buildings.

• Maintaining / Enhancing Habitat

• Green Corridors

• Ground Pollution

• Contaminated Land

• Landscaping Schemes

Business

Providing opportunities for businesses to locate and serve both the locality and provide jobs for people living in and around the development.

• Inward Investment

• Local Employment

• Knowledge Sharing

• Sustainable Charters

Community Designing the development to support a vibrant new community which can integrate with surrounding areas, avoiding creating actual or perceived ’gated’ communities.

• Social Impact Assessment

• Community Engagement

• Sustainable Lifestyles

• Facilities Management

• Mixed of Use

• Affordable Housing

Place Shaping

Provide a framework for the design of a ‘real place’ with an identity that ensures that people can instinctively find their way around. Also ensuring that the new development draws from the

• Site Selection

• Defensible Space

• Active Frontages


Scope of the Scheme


local context and heritage.

• Green Space

• Secured by Design

• Housing Density

Buildings Ensuring that the design of individual buildings contribute to the sustainability of the overall development through high environmental standards.

• BREEAM Buildings

• Code for Sustainable Homes

• Building refurbishment

The final score calculated by the BREEAM for Communities assessor is a measurement of how well a final planning application or masterplan proposal and its supporting documentation have performed against the complete range of assessment criteria (at the point of assessment). Once successfully certified by BRE Global’s quality assurance system, a rating of Fail, Pass, Good, Very Good, Excellent or Outstanding will be awarded.

The performance targets go beyond the minimum standard needed to satisfy planning policy requirements or other legislation. The targets represent minimum, good or best practice in the field of planning and sustainable development.

Each issue is set out with the following information:

• Issue information: Issue ID, issue title, category, sub-category, whether the issue is a mandatory issue, level of policy, size of development and type of development.

• Aim: Broadly outlines the objective of the issue i.e. the impact it intends to mitigate.

• Assessment criteria: Outlines the development performance target / benchmark and its criteria.

• Schedule of evidence required: Outlines typical examples of the type of information that must be collected from the development team/client by the BREEAM assessor so they can assess if the development complies with the issue criteria.

• Additional information: Details relevant definitions of BREEAM terminology and contains information to support the assessment and compliance of the development.

• Regional applicability / questions: Provides a link between the specific credit issue within BREEAM for Communities to the relevant question within a current regional sustainability checklist.

1.5.4 Minimum Mandatory Credits

The following credits are deemed ‘Minimum – Mandatory requirements’ that ALL projects must meet to obtain certification. If one of these credits has not been met then the project will not be awarded a score or achieve final certification against BREEAM for Communities:


Scope of the Scheme


• Climate and Energy

o CE1 Flood Risk Assessment

o CE2 Surface Water Run Off

o CE5 Energy Efficiency

o CE6 Onsite Renewables

• Community

o COM1 Inclusive Design

o COM2 Consultation

• Place Shaping

o PS5 Design and Access

o PS7 Local Demographics

o PS8 Affordable Housing

• Ecology and Biodiversity

o ECO1 Ecological Survey

• Transport

o TRA9 Local Parking

o TRA11 Impact Assessment

• Resources

o RES1 Low Impact

• Business

o There are NO Minimum – Mandatory Business Requirements

• Buildings

o BLD1 Domestic

o BLD2 Non-Domestic

The following pages contain an example of a BREEAM for Communities issue:


Scope of the Scheme


1.5.5 Example of a BREEAM Communities Issue:

Note: this BREEAM for Communities issue has been edited for the purpose of demonstration.

Information box appears in the top of each BREEAM Communities issue and contains the following information: - Category - Issue unique ID - Issue Title - Sub Category

Guidance box provides information on whether the issues are: - core or optional - origin of policy driver - size of development

applicable - type of development

The Aim describes the objective of the issue and the impact that the Assessment Criteria seeks to mitigate.

The Assessment Criteria details the requirements that the assessed development must demonstrate compliance with for the available BREEAM credits to be awarded.

Each BREEAM issue contains further information on the Compliance Requirements table. It provides additional guidance on the application and interpretation of the Assessment Criteria.


Scope of the Scheme


The Schedule of Evidence Required table describes the types of information that must be provided to the BREEAM assessor as evidence of the assessed developments compliance with the Assessment Criteria.

The Schedule of Evidence table is split in to two sections. The first details the type(s) of evidence required at the outline planning stage of assessment. The second describes the type(s) of evidence required at the detailed planning stage of assessment. The numbers in the table correspond to the numbered assessment criteria in the above sections.


Scope of the Scheme


Please Note: Where an issue is deemed mandatory by national policy this is indicated in the Assessment Criteria Credit references, where the minimum requirement is displayed as: Minimum – Mandatory.

The Additional Information section contains definitions of terms used in the Assessment Criteria and Compliance Notes section. This section will also contain further information relevant to the issue e.g. assessment guidance and relevant websites


Scope of the Scheme


Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum - Mandatory)

Where evidence is provided to demonstrate that an energy strategy will be developed for the proposed development to optimise the incorporation of energy efficiency measures into the buildings on the site – including as a minimum:

a) Minimising energy demand for the site through orientation and passive solar design

b) Maximising the thermal efficiency of building envelopes

c) Minimising consumption of energy used for water heating, space heating and cooling, lighting and power in individual buildings through efficient equipment and controls

2 (Good)

In addition to optimising the energy efficiency of all buildings on site, a feasibility study will be conducted to:

a) Calculate the residual energy demand for the site

b) Maximise the amount of the residual demand which can be met efficiently by Low or Zero Carbon (LZC) technologies

3 (Best)

Once the first and second credit have been achieved, the energy strategy will aim to:

• Meet the remaining demand through an appropriate Allowable Solution (as defined by current government policy)

All issues that are designated Minimum – Mandatory must be assessed and the Minimum achieved to allow Certification.

1.5.6 Additional Credit issues

Within the core BREEAM for Communities Manual are a series of ‘additional tradeable credits’. These are credits that sit outside the Regional Sustainability Checklist’s but that BRE Global believe may be relevant to Local Authorities or Developers.

Under the localism agenda there is an element of greater flexibility in planning proposals. These additional credits are designed to reflect this level of flexibility. They DO NOT sit within the core calculations of a developments overall score. They are to be included at the discretion of the BREEAM for Communities Assessor and the Local Authority dependent on their own requirements.

Should these Credits be included within an assessment they will contribute to the projects overall score AND NOT PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CREDIT (as per the Innovation Credits).


Scope of the Scheme


These Credits can be included in an assessment through the use of the BREEAM for Communities Assessment tool. For Further information please contact BRE Global: [email protected].

1.5.7 National Assessment Framework

This BREEAM for Communities Manual has been updated subject to the removal of RSS’s. As a result BREEAM for Communities has moved to a National Assessment Framework whereby ALL of the Credits included within the manual will now apply to ALL assessments. Where issues were previously considered ‘Not Applicable’ these will be included within the assessment criteria. These will be subject to a default weighting of 0.7.

Should the relevant local planning authority wish to use the old version of the Regional Sustainability Checklists (RSC’s) this can be achieved by contacting BRE Global, who will issue a version of the Assessment Tool with the relevant questions marked as ‘Not Applicable’.

Please Note that Section 2.3.1 details the requirements for a Compliant Assessment Methodology. In effect ALL of the RSC’s have been incorporated within this BREEAM for Communities Technical Guidance Manual so can be used to assess any England based project.



Scope of the Scheme


2.0 Scope

This section of the BREEAM manual outlines the scope of the BREEAM for Communities scheme and the type of development projects that it can be applied to.

The following information is provided in this section:

• The BREEAM for Communities assessment and certification stages

• The Sustainable Development Framework; its structure and process

• Type of projects that can be assessed using BREEAM for Communities

• Size of developments that can be assessed using BREEAM for Communities.

2.1 BREEAM for Communities

The BREEAM for Communities scheme can be used to assess the environmental impacts (social, environmental and economic) of a site-wide development in accordance with this document, within specific English Regions. Assessments using the BREEAM for Communities scheme can be carried out throughout the rest of the UK (Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland), but it must be recognised that BREEAM is tailored to the specified planning policy requirements for specific English Regions. No concessions are made in the schemes where the planning policy and legislative requirements differ from those within England. For information on how to conduct an assessment in Wales or Ireland please contact BRE Global. Assessments in Scotland should refer to the BREEAM for Communities Scotland Guidance Manual, available from the BREEAM Extranet.

Please note that whilst the regional structure of Government has been abolished as part of the coalition Governments revisions to the planning system, BREEAM for Communities retains its regional variations and weightings to ensure that the issues that were considered pertinent at the time of development remain consistent.

Where a regional sustainability checklist is not available, the use of a BREEAM for Communities Bespoke assessment is required.

2.2 BREEAM for Communities Bespoke

Where the development requiring assessment does not fall within the scope of the BREEAM for Communities scheme, it can be assessed using the BREEAM for Communities Bespoke assessment scheme.

Where the development requiring assessment is outside of UK it can also be assessed using the BREEAM for Communities Bespoke Assessment scheme; this includes buildings in the Republic of Ireland where it is not appropriate to use a UK scheme. BREEAM for Communities Bespoke can be used to assess a single development or BRE Global can assist in creating a BREEAM for Communities scheme for a particular country or region.

Further information on the BREEAM for Communities Bespoke scheme is available via the BREEAM Helpdesk: [email protected] and through the BREEAM Extranet.



Scope of the Scheme


Current Bespoke assessment manuals that have been verified by BRE Global include, but are not exclusive to:

• BREEAM for Communities Scotland (SD5071)

• BREEAM for Communities Sheffield (SD5065Cv002)

These additional Technical Guidance Manuals are available from the BREEAM Extranet: www.breeam.org/page.jsp?id=155

2.3 BREEAM for Communities Stages of Assessment

BREEAM for Communities can be used to assess the environmental impacts arising as a result of a site wide development (including external site areas) at the following stages:

1. Registration of BREEAM for Communities ‘Compliant Assessment Framework’

2. Interim BREEAM for Communities Certificate – completed at the Outline Planning Stage (OPS)

3. Final BREEAM for Communities Certificate – completed at the Detailed Planning Stage (DPS)

2.3.1 Registration of ‘Compliant Assessment Framework’

The registration of a ‘compliant assessment framework’ is the first step and a mandatory requirement if a development wants to achieve certification against the BREEAM for Communities standard. The ‘compliant assessment framework’ will be created by a qualified BREEAM for Communities assessor through the use of a ‘compliant assessment methodology’. It encapsulates the key sustainability objectives and planning policy requirements for a specific development project as identified and determined by the local planning authority and the development team.

Note: For further information on the selection of a ‘compliant assessment methodology’ and the creation of a ‘compliant assessment framework’ refer to section 2.4: The Sustainable Development Framework. Interested assessors should also refer to the associated BREEAM for Communities Bespoke Assessment Process document which details the bespoke assessment requirements in more detail. Any further enquiries should be sent to the BRE Helpdesk: [email protected].

2.3.2 Interim Certificate – Outline Planning Stage (Optional)

The preliminary planning stage assessment and subsequent ‘Interim’ Certification measures the commitments outlined at the preliminary planning stage against the key sustainability objectives and planning policies, within the applicable local planning system.

• The ‘Interim’ Certificate is an optional stage of assessment, laying the foundation to address key sustainability objectives at the later stages of the development.

• The ‘Interim’ Certificate does not contain a final assessment rating, it only indicates whether the submitted assessment report has passed or failed. It is represented as a percentage score against the final assessment criteria for the specific assessment




Scope of the Scheme


report made at the preliminary planning stage.

• The ‘Interim’ Certificate cannot be used in place of the ‘Final’ Certificate as there is not enough detail at this stage to clearly measure the development’s performance against key sustainability objectives.

The consideration of environmental, social and economic sustainability issues at an early stage in the development process will assist in achieving high-level sustainability objectives and reduce the overall costs for a proposed development project.

2.3.3 Final Certificate – Detailed Planning Stage (Mandatory)

The final planning stage assessment and subsequent ‘Final’ Certification measures the detailed commitments outlined within the final planning stage application against the key sustainability objectives and planning policy requirements within the applicable local planning system.

• The ‘Final’ Certification is the only stage of assessment that provides an overall sustainability rating against the commitments of a specific development project.

• The ‘Final’ Certificate can be achieved by either completing a review of the ‘Interim’ Certificate and the preliminary planning stage assessment to verify the final planning stage assessment or by proceeding directly to final planning stage assessment.

• The ‘Final’ Certificate is a mandatory requirement to achieve an overall BREEAM for Communities assessment rating and is audited in accordance with the reporting and evidential requirements.

• Only BREEAM for Communities Licensed and Qualified Assessors can conduct and assessment of a proposed development against the BREEAM for Communities certification standard.


Scope of the Scheme


Diagram 1: role of the BREEAM for Communities assessor and BRE Global


Scope of the Scheme


2.4 The Sustainable Development Framework

The sustainable development framework provides key stakeholders with a structure and process capable of delivering sustainable developments that help secure the environment, economy and well-being of a development.

Stakeholders include national, regional and local government departments, development teams, project managers and planning consultants, as well as local communities. The framework focuses on early identification of sustainability issues at the statutory planning application stage of the development process.

Diagram 2: Outline of the Sustainable Development Framework

2.4.1 The Structure

The structure of the framework outlines the environmental, social and economic sustainability objectives that are linked to core planning policy requirements to guide and support the delivery of national, regional and local policy targets.

The structure enables the use of compliant assessment methodologies to develop local area and site specific sustainability targets for a proposed development project which can be independently certified against the BREEAM for Communities standard by an appropriately qualified BREEAM for Communities assessor.


Scope of the Scheme


Bespoke assessment MUST meet the requirements of the Sustainable Development Framework and be verified by BRE Global prior to Certification.

2.4.2 Compliant Assessment Methodologies

Compliant assessment methodologies address the specific economic, environmental and social sustainability issues and policy requirements of a proposed development.

The methodologies are used to guide development(s) towards achieving certification against the BREEAM for Communities standard. The methodologies help facilitate the negotiation between the local planning authority and the development team from the beginning of the decision-making process; to encourage, set and agree on a series of sustainability targets within a planning policy context1.

Note: Other compliant assessment methodologies may be used after being submitted to BRE Global for approval.2 For further information on the requirements for this process please refer to the BREEAM for Communities Bespoke Assessment Document.

2.4.3 Compliant Assessment Frameworks

A site specific compliant assessment framework is created through the use of a compliant assessment methodology by the development team and the local planning authority to determine the key sustainability objectives and planning policy requirements for a proposed project.

The compliant assessment framework must be approved and then registered with BRE Global through the BREEAM Centre, before a qualified BREEAM for Communities assessor can start to compile the final assessment report for certification against the BREEAM for Communities bespoke standard.

1 Contact BRE Global for further details on how to register a compliant assessment methodology.

2 Other compliant assessment methodologies may be used after being submitted to BRE Global for approval. Each approved compliant assessment methodology must meet the following qualification requirements2:

a) It covers the scope of assessment as outlined within the core categories of the BREEAM Communities standard

b) It provides information on the process that will be used to determine the final assessment criteria and the resulting compliant assessment framework

c) It outlines how representative stakeholders will be engaged and consulted to assist in determining the final assessment criteria and the compliant assessment methodology

d) It ensures that the final assessment criteria and the associated compliant assessment framework will be created independently from the development project team

e) It demonstrates that a qualified BREEAM Communities assessor will conduct the assessment against the final criteria and the compliant assessment framework

f) It identifies how the performance of the development project will be measured against the common metric specified within the BREEAM Communities certification standard


Scope of the Scheme


2.4.4 The Process

The framework provides the core foundation from which specific sustainability objectives and relevant planning requirements are established. This can then be used to measure the performance of the proposed development against the BREEAM for Communities standard.

These targets must be prepared based on core criteria contained within a compliant assessment methodology. Once the compliant assessment framework has been created and agreed, a licensed BREEAM for Communities assessor compiles an assessment report detailing how, and to what extent, the developer has met the targets utilising the BREEAM for Communities Assessment Tool.

To achieve certification, the assessor calculates the final score and submits a report to BRE Global. BRE Global will then conduct a quality assurance audit and subject to a successful result, will issue a BREEAM for Communities certificate for that stage of the development project.

a) First Phase: Selection of a Compliant Assessment Methodology

The formal process used by the sustainable development framework allows the developer, subject to agreement by the local planning authority, to select the most appropriate compliant assessment methodology to assist in determining the final assessment criteria for the specific development.

b) Second Phase: Creation of a Compliant Assessment Framework

Following agreement from the local planning officer, the developer utilises the selected compliant assessment methodology for the creation of a compliant assessment framework. This framework provides the core foundation from which specific sustainability objectives and relevant planning requirements are established, which can then be used to measure the performance of the proposed development against the BREEAM for Communities standard.

The compliant assessment methodologies are used to guide the creation of the agreed compliant assessment framework that addresses specific planning policy requirements, as well as the environmental, social and economic sustainable potential of the proposed development.

c) Third Phase: Independent Assessment and Certification

The final phase in the overall process is certification of the compliant assessment framework against the BREEAM for Communities standard. Through an independent and qualified BREEAM assessor, BREEAM for Communities is used to verify that the commitments made have been followed through by the development team. The assessor collects the evidence required to compile the assessment report, which is submitted to BRE Global for quality assurance and certification.


Scope of the Scheme


2.5 Type of projects that can be assessed and certified against the BREEAM for Communities standard

A BREEAM for Communities assessment can be carried out at the above stages for the following types of site-wide development projects:

2.5.1 Type of Buildings • Domestic

• Mixed Use

• Non-Domestic (subject to confirmation from BRE Global).

Note: Contact BRE Global to register a Non-Domestic development project under the BREEAM for Communities Bespoke standard.

2.5.2 Type of Developments • New developments

• Regeneration projects

• Other (subject to confirmation from BRE Global).

2.5.3 Size of Developments • Small: up to 10 units

• Medium: between 11 and 500 units

• Large: up to 5999 units

• Bespoke: 6000 or greater (subject to confirmation from BRE Global).

2.5.4 Location of Developments

Projects registered within one of the nine English Regions can be assessed using the Core BREEAM for Communities Standard (Technical Guidance Manual). Regions and countries outside of the English Regions will require the creation of a Bespoke BREEAM for Communities Standard (please contact the BREEAM Centre for further information, [email protected]).

The above information is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the areas covered by the scope of the BREEAM for Communities scheme. Where a proposed development is not covered under the indicators listed above, the site can still be assessed through the use of an appropriate ‘compliant assessment methodology’ and certified against the BREEAM for Communities Bespoke Standard.

Note: If the assessor has reason to believe that the scheme is not appropriate given the unique nature of the development, BRE Global should be contacted for advice ([email protected]).




Scope of the Scheme


2.6 Definitions Compliant Assessment Framework: final set of questions used by an independent assessor to assess the sustainability performance of a development proposal. Compliant Assessment Methodology: individual tool / approach used by an independent assessor to assess the sustainability performance of a development proposal. Development Control Process: refers to the process whereby a local planning authority receives and considers the merits of a planning application and whether it should be given permission with reference to the development plan and all other material considerations.

Environmental Impact Assessments (EIAs) and Environment Statement (ES): refers to certain types of developments, usually more significant schemes requiring the submission of an "environmental statement" accompanying a planning application. This evaluates the likely environmental impacts of the development, together with an assessment of how the severity of the impacts could be reduced.

Final Planning Stage or Detailed Planning Stage: refers to a planning application seeking full permission for a development proposal, with no matters reserved for later planning approval.

Mandatory: the key requirements within the BREEAM for Communities process, notably the assessment of a development proposal at Final Planning Stage (rather than Outline Planning Stage which is optional).

Preliminary Planning Stage or Outline Planning Stage: refers to general application for planning permission to establish that a development is acceptable, subject to subsequent approval of detailed matters.

Scheme Documents: refers to the applicable national documentation that supports the use of this Standard for assessments and certification within the applicable region or country.

Standard: refers to the BREEAM for Communities Certification Standard

Strategic Environmental Assessments (SEAs): refers to an environmental assessment of certain plans and programmes including those in the field of planning and land use, which complies with the EU Directive 2001/42/EC.

Sustainability Appraisals (SAs): refers to an appraisal of the economic, environmental and social effects of a plan from the outset of the preparation process to allow decisions to be made that accord with sustainable development.

Sustainability Objectives: includes the environmental, social, economic and associated planning process requirements that have been highlighted by the local planning authority. These objectives are based on national, regional and local planning policy requirements and are tailored by the local planning authority for a specific development project.


Scope of the Scheme


2.7 How to use the BREEAM for Communities Assessment Tool Filter

This section of the manual should be read in conjunction with the BREEAM for Communities Assessment tool.

Please Note: the BREEAM Communities Assessment Tool is only available through the BREEAM Extranet to licensed BREEAM for Communities Assessors.

When using the assessment tool assessors should use the filter to ensure the relevant criteria are applied to the project they are assessing. This includes:

Region: Please select the region within the UK in which your project lies Geographically.

Site Size: Please select the development size of your project, based on the number of units to be built.

Development Type: Please select the type of development.

Land Use: Please select the nature of the development. Where the development type is a major regeneration project on brownfield land please select Brownfield.


BREEAM Scoring and Rating


3.0 Scoring and Rating

This section of the BREEAM for Communities manual explains how an assessed development’s certified BREEAM for Communities rating is calculated.

There are a number of elements that determine the BREEAM for Communities rating; these are as follows:

• BREEAM rating benchmarks

• BREEAM regional weightings

• Mandatory or optional credit issues

• Mandatory Issues require the assessment to comply with the First Credit as a minimum requirement

• Additional (Tradeable) Credits

• Additional BREEAM credits (percentage score) for Innovation.

Each of these elements are described in the sections on the following pages. This is followed by guidance and an example describing how a BREEAM for Communities rating is calculated.

In addition, there is a section describing the conditions that must be met in order to award a ‘BREEAM Outstanding’ rating, the highest achievable BREEAM for Communities rating.

Please Note: A development proposal cannot achieve a BREEAM for Communities Final Certificate and Rating without addressing ALL of the Mandatory – Minimum Credit issues within the Technical Guidance Manual. Where these issues are not met the development proposal will not achieve a Pass – this is consistent with all other BREEAM Schemes.

Only under exceptional circumstances will BRE Global review Minimum – Mandatory requirements. If assessors feel their project may not achieve a Minimum – Mandatory Credit they are recommended to contact BRE Global ([email protected]) or the BREEAM for Communities Scheme Manager.

Please Note: BRE Global understand there may be variations between the final masterplan submitted for Certification and the project that progresses for planning. Where any potential differences in final documentation translate to a 5% difference in the final BREEAM for Communities Final Score the project MUST be resubmitted for assessment. Any instances where there are major discrepancies between the final certificate and final submission to a planning authority will result in the Final Certificate being revoked and the assessor’s license reviewed.





3.1 BREEAM for Communities rating benchmarks

The rating benchmarks for BREEAM for Communities are outlined in Table 2 for all new development projects, regeneration projects and, where applicable to the BREEAM for Communities scheme, bespoke assessment projects (refer to scope document).

Table 2: BREEAM for Communities rating benchmarks

BREEAM Communities Rating % score

UNCLASSIFIED <25

PASS ≥25

GOOD ≥40

V GOOD ≥55

EXCELLENT ≥70

OUTSTANDING* ≥85

Note: There are additional requirements for achieving a BREEAM for Communities ‘Outstanding’ rating. Please refer to the guidance below.




3.2 BREEAM environmental section weightings

There are two key components to the functionality behind the scoring within the BREEAM for Communities scheme.

The first component is the filter mechanism that selects from a comprehensive issue list the applicable credit issues that apply to that specific development in its defined region / location. Mandatory issues are consistent throughout each of the regions and form the basis from which the performance of the overall development can be measured.

Diagrams 3: outline of the BREEAM for Communities issue filter mechanism:

1. Core (National) Credits2. Optional (Regional) Credits

- Optional Credits filtered depending on specific region.

- Standard front-end weighting for each region within the TGM.

Eg, Flood Risk

3 Credits – Zone 12 Credits – Zone 2 1 Credit - Zone 3a Size of Development

- Small - Medium- Large

Optional (Regional) Credits

Eg. Indoor Environment Quality

- South East (Yes)- North West (No)- East England (Yes)

If yes then the credit will apply in the same manner as the inclusion of existing BREEAM scheme credits across the Non-Domestic.

(Assessment Spreadsheet)

- Weightings of Credits - Minimum Standards- Regional / Local Policy

Eg. Flood Risk (Score 3 Credits in TGM)

North West- Weighting (0.7)- RSS Reference - NW Min. Std

South East- Weighting (0.9)- RSS Reference- SE Min. Std.




The second component of the scoring system for BREEAM for Communities is the regional weighting factor which is applied to each credit. This regional weighting factor has been determined by regional expert groups and provides regional variation between specific issues.

Table 4: screenshot of BREEAM for Communities regional weightings

Note: These weightings are currently based on the specific regional sustainability checklist and their associated links to regional policy.




3.3 Additional Tradeable Credits

Additional Tradeable Credits are available for assessment. These Credits sit outside the Regional Sustainability Checklists but are considered relevant for assessment projects. The use of these Credits is determined by the assessor and development organisation.

Where relevant they can be included in the assessment and will be assessed as per the compliance requirement(s) of each Credit.

3.4 BREEAM credits for innovation

Innovation credits provide additional recognition of a development that innovates in the field of sustainable performance, above and beyond the level that is currently recognised and rewarded within the standard BREEAM issues. Innovation credits therefore enable clients and design teams to boost their development(s) BREEAM performance and in addition, help support the market for new and innovative technologies and practices.

An additional 1% score can be added to a final BREEAM for Communities projects score for each Innovation credit achieved. The maximum number of Innovation credits that can be awarded for any one development proposal assessed is 10; therefore the maximum available score achieved for ‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the final BREEAM rating i.e. they are awardable at any BREEAM rating level.

The path through which a development can achieve an Innovation credit starts when an application is made to BRE Global by the BREEAM assessor to have a particular development feature, system or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the application is successful an Innovation credit can be awarded. The flow chart and eligibility criteria below outline the process to be used when applying for an Innovation credit. An additional fee is charged for each innovation credit application submitted to BRE Global.




Does innovation comply with the eligibility criteria?

Submit a completed innovation credit application form

Identify innovative feature or process not covered by existing

No Is there a BREEAM credit which already includes the

Feature or process is not relevant, so an innovation credit will not

No

Yes Yes

Does it exceed the standard credit

No

Yes

Does it meet the requirements of the Exemplary Performance

No

Yes An exemplary performance credit can be awarded in the Does the credit

application meet the requirements of the judging panel?

Innovation credit can be awarded

No Has additional evidence or information been requested?

Yes

No No Innovation credit will be

Yes

Application will be reviewed by a judging panel.

BREEAM Innovation credit: application flow chart




3.4.1 Eligibility Criteria for Innovation Credits

The following criteria will be used to evaluate the eligibility of claims for proposed Innovation credit status:

a) Does the feature, system or process aim to reduce the development’s impact on one of the following overarching environmental/social issues?

• Mineral Resource Depletion

• Fossil Fuel Depletion

• Acidification

• Climate Change

• Nuclear Waste

• Stratospheric Ozone Depletion

• Eco-toxicity

• Eutrophication

• Human Toxicity

• Photochemical Ozone Creation (Summer Smog)

• Waste Disposal

• Water Use

• Deforestation

• Urban Sprawl

• Reduction of Biodiversity

• Noise and Nuisance

• Loss of Heritage

• Indoor comfort

• Health and Safety

• Access and Inclusion




b) Can the impact of the feature, system or process be assessed objectively using clearly defined criteria?

c) Can the sustainability benefits of the feature, system or process be demonstrated?

d) Have a draft aim, credit criteria, compliance requirements and information required to demonstrate compliance been developed (in accordance with the Innovation credit application form)?

A BREEAM assessor can obtain the Innovation credit application form from the BREEAM Office (please contact [email protected]). The form details the eligibility criteria listed above and the fee payable for each submitted application for an Innovation credit. This can also be downloaded from the BREEAM Extranet.

Innovation credits cannot be awarded until written approval is received from the BREEAM Office.





3.5 Process for calculating a BREEAM for Communities rating

A BREEAM for Communities assessor must determine the BREEAM for Communities rating using the BREEAM for Communities Assessment Tool in conjunction with an approved ‘compliant assessment framework’ and Technical Guidance Manual. An indication of performance against the BREEAM for Communities standard can also be determined using a ‘compliant assessment methodology’. The process of determining a BREEAM for Communities rating is outlined below and in Table 5:

1. For each BREEAM section the number of credits awarded must be determined by a BREEAM for Communities assessor in accordance with the BREEAM for Communities requirements (detailed in the technical sections of the scheme manual).

2. Each individual issue has a maximum of three credits available. This is then multiplied against the corresponding regional weighting to provide the BREEAM for Communities score available for that particular issue.

3. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM for Communities score. The BREEAM for Communities score is compared to the benchmarks and, provided all core requirements have been met, the relevant BREEAM for Communities rating is achieved.

4. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM for Communities score for each Innovation credit achieved (up to a maximum of 10%).

Note: Where applicable to the BREEAM for Communities scheme (see Scope of the BREEAM Scheme).

Please Note that the overall section scores are added together in BREEAM for Communities to ensure that each section carries equal weight.




Table 5: Example BREEAM for Communities score and rating calculation

Development Performance by Section

Regional

Weighting Credits

Available Credits

Achieved Potential Credits

% Score Achieved

Climate & Energy 17.79% 24 15.7 15.7 -

Place making 18.01% 24.3 22.9 23.3 -

Community 7.78% 10.5 10.5 10.5 -

Transport 22.24% 30 18.6 23 -

Ecology 5.34% 7.2 4.8 4.8 -

Resources 16.01% 21.6 10.3 12.2 -

Business 5.78% 7.8 5.7 5.7 -

Buildings 3.34% 4.5 3.8 3.8 -

Innovation N/A 5 5 5 -

Total BREEAM for Communities Score 72.13%




3.5.1 BREEAM for Communities Outstanding Rating

The following conditions must be met in order to certify a development project at the ‘Outstanding’ BREEAM for Communities rating level:

1. The development must achieve a Final BREEAM Communities Score ≥ 85%

2. Each mandatory issue has been addressed – mandatory issues relate to national planning policy

3. Each mandatory issue has been addressed – each mandatory issue relates to either national or key regional planning policy requirements

4. Provision of material for the production and publication of a case study (refer to guidance below) on the ‘Outstanding’ rated development.

In addition to the above, the BREEAM for Communities ‘Outstanding’ development is required to follow-up the Final Certificate achieved at the Detailed Planning Stage with a commitment to obtain certification against the BREEAM for Communities standard at the following assessment stages:

• Post Construction Review Stage and / or Post Occupancy Evaluation Stage (Stage Three in the BREEAM for Communities process)

These additional assessment stages help to ensure that the commitments made during the masterplanning stage of the development process are delivered by the development team in order to maintain the rating. Where the development has not been registered for certification against the BREEAM for Communities scheme, at the Post Construction Review Stage or Post Occupancy Evaluation Stage, the Outstanding rating will be downgraded to an Excellent rating, after the expiry of five years from issue of the BREEAM for Communities ‘Final’ Certificate issued at the Detailed Planning Stage

3.5.2 Production of Case Study

One of the most important aspects of the ‘Outstanding’ BREEAM for Communities rating will be that projects receiving this rating will act as exemplars for the industry. It is therefore a very important aspect of the new rating that a good-quality case study is produced that project teams can refer to.

The project team and client will be asked via the certificate request form to agree to provide relevant development / project information to allow BRE Global to produce a case study. This information will be required with the formal detailed planning stage BREEAM assessor’s report for the assessed development and its supporting documentation.

Subject to approval from the project team / client, BRE Global will publish the case study on the BREEAM website, Green Book live website and other BRE / BREEAM-related publications (as appropriate). Where information is not provided for the production of a case study, the development will be certified to a BREEAM for Communities ‘Excellent’ rating.


Climate and Energy


Guidance

Climate & Energy Mandatory Status Size Type CE1 – Flood Risk Assessment

(Location) Yes National SML ALL

Water Management


Aim

To ensure that sites and developments take due account of flood risk, and where it is present, take appropriate measures to reduce the risk of flooding:

• Is the development sited and designed in accordance with the Sequential Approach as set out in PPS25?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where evidence provided demonstrates that the buildings located on the development site are located in a zone defined as having a medium annual probability of flooding AND includes “highly vulnerable” uses BUT passes the Exception Test set out in PPS25;

OR

Where evidence provided demonstrates that the buildings on the development site are located in a zone defined as having a high annual probability of flooding AND includes “more vulnerable” uses BUT passes the Exception Test set out in PPS25.

AND

The development is appropriately flood resilient and resistant, including safe access and escape routes where required and any residual risk can be safely managed.


Guidance



Water Management


2 (Good)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that the buildings on the development site are located in a zone defined as having a medium annual probability of flooding AND that there are no “highly vulnerable” uses within the development application;

OR

Where evidence provided demonstrates that the buildings on the development site are located in a zone defined as having a high annual probability of flooding AND there are only “less vulnerable” or water compatible” uses within the development application;

AND

The development is appropriately flood resilient and resistant, including safe access and escape routes where required and any residual risk can be safely managed.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that the buildings on the development site are located in a zone defined as having a low annual probability of flooding.

Compliance Requirements

The following demonstrates compliance;

One Credit (Minimum - Mandatory);

1. The assessed buildings on the development are situated within Zone 2 on Environment Agency floodmaps (as defined in PPS25 – ‘Planning and Flood Risk’).

2. The development application includes “highly vulnerable” uses.

OR

1. The assessed buildings on the development are situated within Zone 3a on Environment Agency floodmaps (as defined in PPS25 – ‘Planning and Flood Risk’).

2. The development application includes “more vulnerable” uses.

AND

3. A Flood Risk Assessment has been produced as per PPS25 and confirmed that:


Guidance



Water Management


• The development passed the Exception Test set out in PPS 25.

• The ground level of the development, and access to it and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are at least 600mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development is located.

Two Credits (Good);


2. There are no “highly vulnerable” uses within the development application.

OR

1. The assessed buildings on the development are situated within Zone 3a on Environment Agency floodmaps (as defined in PPS25 – ‘Planning and Flood Risk’).

2. There are only “less vulnerable” or “water compatible” uses within the development application.

AND

3. A Flood Risk Assessment has been produced as per PPS25 and confirmed that:

• The ground level of the development, and access to it and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are at least 600mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development is located.

• Any residual risks can be safely managed.

Three Credits (Best);


2. A site specific Flood Risk Assessment has been produced as per PPS25 and confirmed that:

• There is low risk of flooding from all sources.


Guidance



Water Management


Compliance Notes

Definition of flood zones

Please refer to the Additional Information section of this credit.

Flood risk vulnerability classification

Please refer to the Additional Information section of this credit.

Flood Risk Assessment (FRA)

The Flood maps accessible from the Environment Agency website only provide a rough estimation of flood risk and cannot be used for planning applications. Flood Risk Assessments (FRA) will refine information on the probability of flooding, taking other sources of flooding and the impacts of climate change into account.

The content of a FRA should always be appropriate to the scale and nature of the development. The outputs of an FRA will be site-specific and dependant on the site characteristics. A typical Level 1 or Level 2 FRA could cover the following:

• Development description and location

• Definition of the flood hazard

• Probability

• Detailed development proposals

• Flood risk management measures

• Off site impacts

• Residual risks

• Climate change.

For more guidance on how to complete an FRA see Planning Policy

Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk - Practice Guide.


Guidance



Water Management


FRA for sites of 1ha or less situated within Zone 1

For developments of less than 1ha (10 000m²) that are situated within Zone 1 (best practise standard), the level of detail required in an acceptable FRA (for CE1) will depend on the size and density of build. This will range from a brief report for small, low density developments to a more detailed assessment for a high density development (2000–10 000m²) in size. For example: for very small developments (2000m² and less), an acceptable FRA could be a Level 1 Screening study as set out by Development and Flood Risk – Guidance for the Construction Industry C624 (CIRIA, 2004). See Guidance Notes for more information on the different Levels of FRA.

Exception Test The Exception Test consists of widening the scope of the FRA to consider the impact of the flood risk management infrastructure on the frequency, impact, speed of onset, depth and velocity of flooding within the Flood Zones considering a range of flood risk management maintenance scenarios.

For the Exception Test to be passed:

1. It must be demonstrated that the development provides wider sustainability benefits to the community that outweigh flood risk, informed by a SFRA where one has been prepared.

2. The development should be on developable or previously developed land or, if it is not on previously developed land, that there are no reasonable alternative sites on developable previously developed land; and

3. A FRA must demonstrate that the development will be safe, without increasing flood risk elsewhere, and, where possible, will reduce flood risk overall.

Sources of flooding

If the development is in Zone 1, the FRA must demonstrate that there is low risk of flooding from the following sources:

• Rivers

• Sea

• Land

• Groundwater

• Sewers


Guidance



Water Management


• Other non-natural or artificial sources of flooding such as reservoirs, canals and lakes where water is retained above natural ground level, operational and redundant industrial processes including mining, quarrying and sand and gravel extraction.

Pre-existing flood defences

In an area protected by pre-existing flood defences (designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) the appropriate number of credits can be awarded where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or ‘medium’ and the following conditions are met:

1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences have to be, or have been constructed, to minimise the risk of flooding to the site and its locality purely for the purpose of the development and / or its wider masterplan.

2. The development is located on a previously developed site benefiting from existing maintained flood defences AND the Environment Agency confirm that, as a result of such defences, the risk of a flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium risk (as appropriate to the credit levels set in BREEAM). If firm confirmation is not provided then the credit cannot be awarded.

A local Environment Agency office may be able to provide more information on the defences in the area where the assessed development is located.

Management and mitigation measures

Management and risk mitigation measures that may be recognised under this Issue include flood defences, flood resistant and resilient design, escape / evacuation, flood warning and emergency planning, robust infrastructure and utility provision.

Defences by default

There are many defences, owned by third parties, which due to their location act as a defence by default, e.g. motorways, railway embankments, walls etc. Confirmation that these defences will remain in place for the lifetime of the development is required if a significant risk is predicted.

600mm threshold 1. It is accepted that, for buildings located in a medium or high risk flood zone, areas such as car parks and access to the site may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the 600mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe access to the site and the building can be maintained (i.e. they are 600mm above the design flood level) to ensure the building / site does not become an ‘island’ in the event of a


Guidance



Water Management


flood.

2. Where the ground levels of the topography / infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600mm threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other practical solutions for access to the site above this level. As much of the external site area as possible (or as required by an appropriate statutory body) should be designed at or above the threshold.

Recommendations from flood agency

None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded against the recommendation of the relevant flood defence agency on the basis that the flooding implications are too great.

Development proceeding in such an area that wish to seek BREEAM for Communities Certification should contact the BREEAM Centre: [email protected]

Impact on functional flood plains

Credits will be withheld if flood defence schemes considered for this issue would reduce the performance of functional flood plains elsewhere.

Assessments in zone 3b

Developments located in zone 3b (classified flood plain) do not achieve any credits unless the proposed development has located only water compatible buildings within this zone. Where this is the case please contact BRE Global ([email protected]) to discuss the project and whether Certification will be possible under BREEAM for Communities.

Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk (PPS25)

PPS25 is available from: http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/pps25floodrisk

Any updates to this PPS in relation to central planning policy will supersede the requirements of BREEAM for Communities.



http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/pp


Guidance



Water Management


Schedule of Evidence Required

Req. Outline Planning Stage Detailed Planning Stage

First Credit

Req. 1 A copy of the Environment Agency flood-map confirming:

• Flood zone or annual probability of flooding in the site location.

As for Outline Planning Stage.

Req. 2 Where appropriate, a letter or email from the appropriate statutory body confirming:

• Reduced risk of flooding due to existing / maintained flood defences.

A copy of the Flood Risk Assessment accompanying the planning application (prepared according to good practice guidance As for Outlined in Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk - Practice Guide to PPS25) confirming as a minimum:

• Design flood level of the development

• Range of ground levels of the buildings, car parking areas and site access showing that the criteria are met, along with any notes required to explain the function of any areas lying below the design flood level

• Assessment of risk

• Location and details of any flood protection measures for the development.

• Where applicable, the development passed the Exception Test.

Req. 3 Letter or email from the design team / client confirming:

• Flood risk vulnerability classification of the uses in the development application.

Second Credit




Guidance



Water Management



Req. 2 Where appropriate, letter or email from the appropriate statutory body confirming:


A copy of the Flood Risk Assessment accompanying the planning application (prepared according to good practice guidance As for Outlined in Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk - Practice Guide) confirming as a minimum:

• Design flood level of the development

• Range of ground levels of the buildings, car parking areas and site access showing that the criteria are met, along with any notes required to explain the function of any areas lying below the design flood level.

• Assessment of risk

• Location and details of any flood protection measures for the development

• Where applicable, the development passed the Exception Test.

Req. 3 Letter or email from the design team/client confirming:

• Flood risk vulnerability classification of the uses in the development application.

Third Credit




Req. 2 Where appropriate, letter or email from the appropriate statutory body confirming:


A copy of the Flood Risk Assessment accompanying the planning application (prepared according to good practice guidance As for Outlined in Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk - Practice Guide) confirming:


Guidance



Water Management


• Low risk of flooding from all sources.


Guidance



Water Management


Guidance Notes

Water Resource Management Plan: Presentation of compliance requirements for the Issue could be addressed under a broader Water Resource Management Plan / Report.

Site Specific Flood Risk Assessment

FRA Level Description Level 1 Screening study to identify whether there are any flooding or surface

water management issues related to a development site that may warrant further consideration. This should be based on readily available existing information, including the SFRA, Environment Agency Flood Map and Standing Advice. The screening study will ascertain whether a FRA Level 2 or 3 is required.

Level 2 Scoping study to be undertaken if the Level 1 FRA indicates that the site may lie within an area that is at risk of flooding, or that the site may increase flood risk due to increased run-off. This study should confirm the sources of flooding which may affect the site.

The study should include the following:

• an appraisal of the availability and adequacy of existing information:

• a qualitative appraisal of the flood risk posed to the site, and potential impact of the development on flood risk elsewhere; and

• an appraisal of the scope of possible measures to reduce the flood risk to acceptable levels.

The scoping study may identify that sufficient quantitative information is already available to complete a FRA appropriate to the scale and nature of the development.

Level 3 Detailed study to be undertaken if the Level 2 FRA concludes that further quantitative analysis is required to assess flood risk issues related to the development site.

The study should include:

• quantitative appraisal of the potential flood risk to the development;

• quantitative appraisal of the potential impact of the development site on


Guidance



Water Management


flood risk elsewhere; and

• quantitative demonstration of the effectiveness of any proposed mitigation measures.

Additional Information

Flood zones are defined for England in PPS25 (England). Definitions are provided in the table below. Please refer to the Environment Agency website for up to date Flood Maps.

Definition England

Low annual probability of flooding

Zone 1

Less than 1 in 1000 chance of river and sea flooding (<0.1%).

Medium annual probability of flooding

Zone 2

Between 1 in 100 and 1 in 1000 chance of river flooding (1% – 0.1%) and between a 1 in 200 and 1 in 1000 chance of sea flooding (0.5% – 0.1%).

High annual probability of flooding

Zone 3a High Probability

1 in 100 or greater chance of river flooding (>1%) and a 1 in 200 or greater chance of flooding from the sea (>0.5%).

Zone 3b The Functional Floodplain

Land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood.

Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Buildings in areas where flood defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) are therefore preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, environmentally it is still preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage implementation of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk of flooding purely for the sake of a new development.


Guidance



Water Management


Flood Risk Vulnerability and Flood Zone Compatibility (Matrix)

Essential Infrastructure

Water Compatible

Highly Vulnerable

More Vulnerable

Less Vulnerable

Zone 1 4 4 4 4 4

Zone 2 4 4 Exception

Test Required

4 4

Zone 3a Exception Test Required 4 7

Exception Test

Required 4

Zone 3b Exception Test Required 4 7 7 7

Legend:

4 Development is appropriate

7 Development should not be permitted

Note: The assessor is not required to perform any calculations as these should be provided by the design team / client or qualified consultant. It is not essential that the calculations are provided but the completed FRA must clearly demonstrate compliance with the requirements of PPS25.


Guidance



Water Management


Glossary of Terms

Appropriate statutory body: this refers to either the Environment Agency or the local authorities and internal drainage boards.

Design flood level: the maximum estimated water level during the design event. The design flood level for a site can be determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site.

Design flood event: an historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.

Exception test: this test provides a method of managing flood risk when it is not possible for the development to be located in zones of lower probability of flooding while still allowing necessary development to occur.

Flood risk: the combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event.

Flood event: A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph.

Flood probability: The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period. For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year.

Flood protection measures: this covers the range of flood protection measures which can be employed to protect and developments from the effects of flooding.

Flood resilient construction: buildings that are designed to reduce the consequences of flooding and facilitate recovery from the effects of flooding sooner than conventional buildings.

Flood resistant construction: buildings that prevent the entry of water or minimise the amount of water that may enter a building where there is flooding outside.

Flood risk assessment: a Flood Risk Assessment should be prepared according to good practice guidance As for Outlined in Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk - Practice Guide. Available from www.communities.gov.uk.

Flood risk vulnerability classification: please refer to Annex D, table D2 of PPS25: ‘Development and Flood Risk’.

Residual Risk: The risk which remains after all risk avoidance, reduction and mitigation measures have been implemented.

http://www.communities.gov.uk


Guidance



Water Management


Sequential Approach: A sequential risk-based approach to determining the suitability of land for development in flood risk areas. PPS 25 requires local planning authorities to apply the sequential approach as part of the identification of land for development in areas at risk of flooding.

Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA): PPS 25 advises that an SFRA should be carried out by local planning authorities to inform the preparation of Local Development Documents, having regard to catchment-wide flooding issues which affect the area. The SFRA is intended to identify the areas within a development plan that are at risk of flooding, to identify and detail those factors that are relevant to current and future flood risk, and to outline policies to be applied to such areas to minimise and manage the risk.


Guidance



Water Management


Risk to Uses

Highly vulnerable uses

• Police, ambulance and fire stations; Command Centres and telecommunications installations required to be operational during flooding.

• Emergency dispersal points. • Basement dwellings. • Caravans, mobile homes and park homes intended for

permanent residential use. • Installations requiring hazardous substances consent.

More vulnerable uses

• Hospitals. • Schools and education facilities. • Residential institutions such as residential care homes,

children’s homes, social services homes, prisons and hostels. • Buildings used for: dwellings; student halls of residence;

drinking establishments; nightclubs; hotels. • Non–residential uses for health services, nurseries and

educational establishments. • Landfill and sites used for waste management facilities for

hazardous waste. • Sites used for holiday or short-let caravans and camping,

subject to a specific warning and evacuation plan.

Less vulnerable uses

• Buildings used for: shops; financial, professional and other services; restaurants and cafes; hot food takeaways; offices; general industry; storage and distribution; non–residential institutions not included in ‘more vulnerable’; and assembly and leisure.

• Land and buildings used for agriculture and forestry. • Waste treatment (except landfill and hazardous waste

facilities). • Minerals working and processing (except for sand and gravel

working). • Water treatment plants. • Sewage treatment plants (if adequate pollution controls are in

place).

Water compatible uses

• Flood control infrastructure. • Water transmission infrastructure and pumping stations. • Sewage transmission infrastructure and pumping stations. • Sand and gravel workings. • Docks, marinas and wharves*. • Navigation facilities. • MOD defence installations. • Ship building, repairing and dismantling, dockside fish

processing, refrigeration and compatible activities requiring a waterside location.


Guidance



Water Management


• Water-based recreation (excluding sleeping accommodation). • Lifeguard and coastguard stations. • Amenity open space, nature conservation and biodiversity,

outdoor sports and recreation and essential facilities such as changing rooms.

• Essential ancillary sleeping or residential accommodation for staff required by uses in this category, subject to a specific warning and evacuation plan.

*Where the development is a waterfront project the FRA MUST make reference and mitigate the risk of any flooding from coastal sources / the water frontage.

Please Note: where the building type is unknown plots should be designated within the masterplan. These plots will be required to meet the exception test with covenants in place ensuring that buildings at risk of flooding are not located on any plot considered at risk of flooding.


Guidance



Water Management



Region Equivalent Sustainability Checklist Weighting

SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 1.0

Y&H 1.0


Guidance

Climate & Energy Mandatory Status Size Type

CE2 – Surface Water Runoff Yes National SML ALL

Water Management


Aim

To reduce the risk of flooding on proposed development sites and adjacent areas of land:

• What measures have been taken to reduce the contribution the development may make to flash flooding?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum – Mandatory)

Where the site is demonstrated to be able to contain rainfall from 1:100 year events.

2 (Good) Where the site is demonstrated to be able to contain rainfall from 1:250 year events.

3 (Best) Where the site is demonstrated to be able to contain rainfall from 1:500 year events.




1. Where a comprehensive Flood Risk Assessment demonstrates that:

a) The peak run off rate into a watercourse or other receiving body is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site (see definition), for at least the 1 year and 100 year return period events.

b) Any additional volume of rainwater discharge predicted to be caused by the new development for a 1 in 100 year event of 6 hour duration (including an allowance for climate change – see PPS25) should be reduced using infiltration and / or made available for use in the development as a replacement for potable water use in non-potable applications such as WC flushing or washing machine operation.

c) Where infiltration and/or rainwater harvesting strategies cannot prevent any part of this additional volume from being discharged to watercourses for all events up to the


Guidance



Water Management


100 year return period, the peak discharge rate from the site has been reduced to either (in order of preference):

1. The pre-development site’s estimated mean annual flood (Qbar);

2. 2l/s/ha;

3. A minimum flow rate (litres per second), based on good practice guidelines to prevent easy blockage, by ensuring the outlet throttle is not too small.

d) Discharging to a public sewer has been taken as a 'last resort' option.

1. If rainwater is discharged to a public sewer or adopted surface water sewer, flow rate requirements will be defined by the Sewerage undertaker.

Two Credits (Good);


b) Any additional volume of rainwater discharge predicted to be caused by the new development for a 1 in 250 year event of 6 hour duration (including an allowance for climate change – see PPS25) should be reduced using infiltration and/or made available for use in the development as a replacement for potable water use in non-potable applications such as WC flushing or washing machine operation.

c) Where infiltration and/or rainwater harvesting strategies cannot prevent any part of this additional volume from being discharged to watercourses for all events up to the 250 year return period, the peak discharge rate from the site has been reduced to either (in order of preference):


2. 2l/s/ha;



If rainwater is discharged to a public sewer or adopted surface water sewer, flow rate requirements will be defined by the Sewerage undertaker.


Guidance



Water Management




b) Any additional volume of rainwater discharge predicted to be caused by the new development for a 1 in 500 year event of 6 hour duration (including an allowance for climate change – see PPS25) should be reduced using infiltration and/or made available for use in the development as a replacement for potable water use in non-potable applications such as WC flushing or washing machine operation.

c) Where infiltration and/or rainwater harvesting strategies cannot prevent any part of this additional volume from being discharged to watercourses for all events up to the 500 year return period, the peak discharge rate from the site has been reduced to either (in order of preference):


2. 2l/s/ha;



1. If rainwater is discharged to a public sewer or adopted surface water sewer, flow rate requirements will be defined by the Sewerage undertaker.


Guidance



Water Management


Compliance Notes

Allowance for climate change

An allowance for climate change should be made in accordance with current best practice and planning policy. This should be applied to both the pre and post development peak rate of runoff and additional volume calculations.

Derelict site For derelict sites which have no runoff to sewers or watercourses, provided the site has derelict for five years or less, the pre-development discharge can be calculated for the previous site’s use.

If the site has been derelict for over five years, then the undeveloped site must be treated as a Greenfield site in order to award credits.

Greenfield runoff rates

For sites of less than 200ha, the calculation of Greenfield runoff rates should be in accordance with Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994).

For sites of 200ha and more, the calculation of Greenfield runoff rates should be in accordance with the Flood estimation handbook (Centre for ecology and hydrology, 1999).

Effectiveness of the water run-off attenuation measures

To ensure effective operation of the water run-off attenuation measures, the facilities must discharge half their volume within 24-48 hours (unless advised otherwise by a statutory body) of the storm event in readiness for any subsequent storm inflow.

Discharge to the sea or estuaries

If all run off is discharged directly from the site to either the sea, estuaries covered by a shoreline management plan or designated wildlife / SSSI areas (as part of habitat management), then the credit may be awarded without the need to specify additional attenuation measures.

Infiltration / rainwater harvesting

The use of rainwater harvesting and / or infiltration must always be investigated for sites where additional volume of rainwater discharge is predicted to be caused by the new development.

Where additional volume can not be prevented from being discharged, either by infiltration or the use rainwater harvesting, the


Guidance



Water Management


FRA must contain technical justification from the appropriately qualified engineer or consultant as to why this is the case. Justification must not be given purely on the basis of additional cost.

Both infiltration and rainwater harvesting will need to be considered before allowing additional volume to be discharged.

The Issue requires that the rainwater harvesting systems counting towards reduction in additional volume, must provide water for use in the development as a replacement for potable water use in non-potable applications such as WC flushing or washing machine operation. Harvesting systems providing water solely for irrigation purposes (such as water butts) cannot be considered under this Issue.

For more guidance on the design, installation, testing and maintenance of rainwater harvesting systems supplying non-potable water in the UK, please refer to BS 8515:2009 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of practice.

Discharge to public sewer or adopted surface water sewer

Where infiltration and the use of rainwater harvesting have been fully investigated for the site but only some (or none) of the additional volume can be reduced, the residual additional volume may be discharged and should be managed according to the hierarchical approach set out above. These options are listed in order of preference. The first approach to take would be to reduce the peak discharge rate from the site to the pre-development site’s estimated mean annual flood flow rate (Qbar). If this is not possible the next favoured option would be to reduce the rate to 2l/s/ha. If this is not possible, a reduction to a minimum flow rate based on good practice to prevent easy blockage should be achieved.

Only once all SUDS devices (including controlled discharge to watercourses) have been fully utilised can the residual of the additional volume be discharged to a public sewer. Flow rate requirements will be defined by the Sewerage undertaker in this instance (see the definition).

A drainage strategy that relies solely on discharging additional volume to public sewers will not comply unless it can be shown in the FRA that the hierarchy of surface water management methods, as specified in this Issue, have been fully investigated and where options are eliminated, technical justifications are given by an appropriately qualified engineer or consultant.


Guidance



Water Management


Meeting requirements imposed by a statutory body

It should be noted that a statement confirming compliance with statutory requirements will not be sufficient to demonstrate performance in this Issue.

If a statutory body explicitly states that surface water run-off on a site must be managed in such a way that would prevent a site from meeting the requirements that are set in this Issue, evidential documentation from that statutory authority should be submitted to the BRE for further guidance.

More stringent requirements imposed by a statutory body

Where the local authority requires a greater attenuation than the percentages above, and/or a more onerous design flooding frequency than that recommended in BS EN752-4, then the higher requirements must be met in order to achieve the credit.

Recommendations from statutory body

None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that the flooding implications are too great.

Impact on functional flood plains

Credits will be withheld if flood defence schemes considered for this Issue would reduce the performance of functional flood plains elsewhere.


Guidance



Water Management




First Credit

Req. 1 Letter or email from the design team / client confirming:

• Appointment of an appropriately qualified engineer or consultant to carry out the calculations and provide design criteria for all relevant elements.


Req. 2 Where an FRA is unavailable at this stage, a letter or email from the appropriately qualified engineer of consultant outlining the essential design criteria including:

• Pre and post development runoff rate calculations for the 1 year and 100 year return period events as a minimum, including an allowance for climate change, and if for a Greenfield site, calculated according to the specified methodology Additional predicted volume calculations including an allowance for climate change and calculated for the 100 year event of 6 hour duration for:

o The new development before any sustainable drainage techniques are added to the site

o The new development after proposed sustainable drainage techniques have been considered. This figure should be zero to demonstrate

Copy of the Flood Risk Assessment including the design specifications, calculations and drawings confirming:

• Pre and post development runoff rate calculations for the 1 year and 100 year return period events as a minimum, including an allowance for climate change, and if for a Greenfield site, calculated according to the specified methodology Additional predicted volume calculations including an allowance for climate change and calculated for the 100 year event of 6 hour duration for:

o The new development before any sustainable drainage techniques are added to the site

o The new development after chosen sustainable drainage techniques are added. This figure should be zero to demonstrate compliance with the criterion and show that post development there will be no additional predicted volume of rainwater discharge.

• Where any part of the additional


Guidance



Water Management


compliance with the criteria and show that post development there will be no additional predicted volume of rainwater discharge.

volume is discharged to watercourses, calculations demonstrating the rate of discharge from site is equal to (in order of preference):

o the pre-development site’s estimated mean annual flood flow rate (Qbar)

o 2l/s/ha.

• a minimum flow rate (litres per second), based on good practice guidelines to prevent easy blockage, by ensuring the outlet throttle is not too small. Where SUDS devices are unable to manage the entire additional volume, or it is found that discharging to a public sewer is the only technically feasible option (this will be a very rare occurrence),

o location of nearest public sewer and confirmation of their availability for servicing the site along with .flow rate requirements

o confirmation that SUDS devices have been fully investigated and where options are eliminated, justifications are given by an appropriately qualified engineer or consultant.

Second Credit

Req. 1 & 2

As for first credit but with calculations demonstrating compliance during a 250 year return period event.

As for first credit but with calculations demonstrating compliance during a 250 year return period event.

Third Credit

Req. 1 & 2

As for first credit but with calculations demonstrating compliance during a

As for first credit but with calculations demonstrating compliance during a 500


Guidance



Water Management


500 year return period event. year return period event.

Guidance Notes

Water Resource Management Plan: Presentation of compliance requirements for this Issue could be addressed under a broader Water Resource Management Plan.


The assessor is not required to perform any calculations as these should be provided by the design team/client.

Glossary of Terms

1:100 event: design storm event with recurrence interval of 100 years - one that has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year.

Appropriately qualified consultant or engineer: a hydrological consultant or engineer with qualifications relevant to the calculation of surface water run off e.g. RICS; RIBA / ARB; ICE; CIBSE member. The level of qualification required will depend on the complexity, size and density of build on the site

Appropriate statutory body: this refers to either the Environment Agency or the local authorities and internal drainage boards.

Design flood level: the maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site.

Design storm event: historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.

Flood risk assessment: a study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the site will have on flood risk on the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk Assessment should be prepared according to good practice guidance As for Outlined in Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk - Practice Guide. Available from www.communities.gov.uk

http://www.communities.gov.uk


Guidance



Water Management


Greenfield: a site which has either never been built on, or one which has lain undisturbed for five years or more.

Greenfield runoff rate: the rate of runoff that would occur from the site in its undeveloped (and therefore undisturbed) state.

ICoP (SUDS): the Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS) aims to facilitate the implementation of sustainable drainage in developments in England and Wales by providing model maintenance agreements and advice on their use. It provides a set of agreements between those public organisations with statutory or regulatory responsibilities relating to SUDS. Available to download from www.ciria.org.uk/suds/icop.html

Infiltration: the passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on.

Peak flow rate: the peak rate of discharge of water from hard surfaces. For calculating the peak flow rate volume, 60 min duration of the design storm event should be used (unless a different duration is required by a statutory body).

Peak runoff rate (referred to as Qp [m³/sec]): this is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchments’ area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over the drainage area, considering the entire drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most downstream point only.

Pre-development: the state of a site immediately before the development under assessment.

Qbar: is an estimation of the mean annual flood from a catchment (see Report IH124 Flood Estimations for small catchments).

Rainwater discharge: is the volume of rain water which flows through a given cross section per unit time, from the development site to watercourses and sewers, usually measured in cubic feet per second (cfs) or cubic meters per second (cms). It is also referred to as runoff.

Rainwater harvesting: A system that collects rainwater from where it falls rather than allowing it to drain away. It includes water that is collected within the boundaries of a property, from roofs and surrounding surfaces.

Runoff: this is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources.

Run-off attenuation measures: this covers the range of construction and equipment which can be employed to attenuate runoff from hard surfaces and roofs. Measures include: underground storage, oversized pipes, holding ponds, swales, reed beds, permeable paving, green roofs, local or centralised soakaways etc.

http://www.ciria.org.uk/suds/icop.html


Guidance



Water Management


Public sewer: A sewer that is vested in and maintained by a sewerage undertaker. Note: sewers are defined as a pipe or channel taking domestic foul and/or surface water from buildings and associated paths and hardstandings from two or more curtilages and having a proper outfall.

Sewerage undertaker: this is a water company with statutory responsibility for provision of sewerage for disposal of sewage and surface water from roofs and yards of premises.

Shoreline Management Plan: SMP’s provide a large scale assessment of the risks associated with coastal processes and presents a policy framework to reduce these risks to people and the developed, historic and natural environment in a sustainable manner.

SSSI: Site of Special Scientific Interest

SUDS: sustainable drainage systems or sustainable (urban) drainage systems: a sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable fashion than some conventional techniques. Some of the most common SUDs devices include:

• Preventative measures - The first stage of the SUDS approach to prevent or reduce pollution and runoff quantities. This may include good housekeeping, to prevent spills and leaks, storage in water butts, rainwater harvesting systems, and alternative roofs (i.e. green and brown roofs).

• Holding ponds

• Swales

• Reed beds

• Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less permeable soils the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in some areas.

• Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function.

• Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system.

• Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.

• Pipes and accessories - A series of conduits and their accessories normally laid underground that convey surface water to a suitable location for treatment and/or


Guidance



Water Management


disposal. (Although sustainable, these techniques should be considered where other SUDS techniques are not practicable).

• Green roofs

In most circumstances and combination of different SUDS devices will be necessary.

Surface Water Runoff: water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or if the rainfall is particularly intense.

Watercourses: a term including all rivers, streams, ditches, drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices and passages conveying surface water.


Guidance



Water Management




SE 0.8

SW 0.9

EoE 1.0

WM N/A

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.9

Y&H N/A


Guidance


CE3 – Rainwater SUDS No National SML ALL

Water Management


Aim

To ensure that roof space is used productively to minimise water demand and manage water run off on the site:

• What percentage of the total roof area in the development is designed to allow the harvesting of rain water for re-use and / or is covered by green roofs?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) At least 5% of the total roof area is designed to harvest rainwater for re-use and / or is covered by green roofs.

2 (Good) Between 25% and 50% of the total roof area is designed to harvest rainwater for re-use and / or is covered by green roofs.

3 (Best) More than 50% of the total roof area is designed to harvest rainwater for re-use and / or is covered by green roofs.

Please Note: where there are regional differences in the Benchmark requirements these will overrule to core BREEAM for Communities Manual i.e. in the South West the Good Benchmark is a minimum of 50%, and the Best benchmark is set as 75%.



One Credit (Minimum);

1. Where at least 5% of the total roof area in the development is designed to allow the harvesting of rain water for re-use and / or is covered by green roofs.

AND

2. Any rainwater collection system is designed in accordance with BS 8515:2009 and the collection area measured in accordance with BS EN 12056-3:2000.


Guidance



Water Management


Two Credits (Good);

1. Where more than 25% and up to 50% of the total roof area in the development is designed to allow the harvesting of rain water for re-use and / or is covered by green roofs.

AND



1. Where more than 50% of the total roof area in the development is designed to allow the harvesting of rain water for re-use and / or is covered by green roofs

AND



Guidance



Water Management


Compliance Notes

Use of rainwater The percentage of collected rainwater must be used to meet (in part) toilet flushing demand and / or washing machines within buildings. Only once demand from these fitting has been satisfied should rainwater be used for irrigation of planting and landscaping demand.

Calculation of roof collection area

The total area of impervious roof surfaces shall be used to calculate the available roof collection area. A calculation method for roof collection area is described in BS EN 12056-3: 2000.

Green roofs Green roofs include extensive green roofs such as sedum mat roofs, substrate based roofs, biodiversity or ‘brown roofs and intensive green roofs.

Use of rainwater The collected rainwater can be used to meet toilet flushing, washing machines demand within buildings and irrigation of planting and landscaping demand. Harvesting systems providing water solely for irrigation purposes (such as water butts) cannot be considered.


Guidance



Water Management




First Credit

Req. 1 Master plan drawings and / or example specifications confirming:

• Type, size and location of any rainwater collection system used in the development.

• Type, size and location of any green roof in the development.

• Total roof area in the development

• Total roof area covered with green roofs

• Total roof area covered with rainwater collection systems


AND

Copy of specifications and drawings confirming:

• How and where the water harvested with the rainwater recycling system will be used

• Compliance with BS EN 12056-3: 2000 (where applicable)

• Compliance with BS 8515:2009 (where applicable).

Req. 2 Specification or letter from the client confirming:

• Rainwater collection systems will be designed in accordance with BS EN 12056-3:2000 and BS 8515:2009.

Second Credit

Req. 1 & 2

As for first credit but with drawings and / or example specifications demonstrating compliance for 25 - 50% of roof area.

As for first credit but demonstrating compliance for 25 - 50% of roof area.


Guidance



Water Management


Third Credit

Req. 1 & 2

As for first credit but with drawings and / or example specifications demonstrating compliance for over 50% of roof area.

As for first credit but demonstrating compliance for over 50% of roof area.

Guidance Notes

Water Resource Management Plan: Presentation of compliance requirements for CE3 Rainwater (SUDS) could be addressed under a broader Water Resource Management Plan.


Note: Water is an increasingly scarce resource and more and more homes have metered water supplies with householders having to pay for any water they use.

Rainwater could be collected to reduce:

• the amount of water being discharged into drains and watercourses.

• the risk of localised flooding.

• overall water bills for householders.

The simplest and most cost-effective system for rainwater collection is the water butt. More complex central collection communal systems (using the same principles as the water butt) are available for apartment blocks.

The specification of the rainwater collector should meet the following criteria:

• no open access at the top of the collector, (a childproof lid is allowed).

• provision of a tap or other arrangement for drawing off water.

• connection to the rainwater down-pipes with an automatic overflow into the conventional rainwater drainage system.

• a means of detaching the rainwater downpipe and access provision to enable cleaning of the interior.


Guidance



Water Management


• where the collection system is to be sited outside, and not buried, it must be stable and adequately supported; the material used for the container shall be durable and opaque to sunlight.

Where the system is part of a rainwater collection system providing internal water, water for external use should be provided in a separate tank to water required for internal water. This could be an overflow pipe leading from the main tank to a correctly specified water butt for external water use. This is to ensure that internal demands for rainwater are met first with excess provided to the external water tank as overflow.

Design issues:

BS4800:1989 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes. This BS covers the need to have pipe work, etc, in standardised colours to avoid cross contamination and sets colours for rainwater system pipes flow and return.

BS1710:1984 Specification for identification of pipelines and services. This BS covers the identifying marks that should be placed on pipes containing different substances, and references the colours in the above BS.

BS8515:2009 Rainwater harvesting systems – Code of practice. This BS gives guidance on the design, installation, testing and maintenance of rainwater harvesting systems supplying non-potable water in the UK

Maintenance issues:

The frequency with which storage tanks require cleaning is dependent on the contaminant load. Correctly designed systems should not require a high frequency of cleaning as the stored rainwater contains fewer nutrients for bacterial growth. Systems in which few contaminants enter the tank can be left for ten or more years without cleaning.


Guidance



Water Management


Glossary of Terms

Rain water recycling: The appropriate collection and storage of rain from hard outdoor surfaces for use instead of potable water in WCs flushing and the like.

Rainwater butt: A large cask or barrel which is set up on end to collect and store rainwater for irrigation purposes.

Central rainwater collection system: A system which will collect and store rainwater for use across the development. This could be a large storage tank or some sort of surface water system.

Research from around the world indicates that green roofs reduce annual run-off from roofs by at least 50%, and more usually by 60-70%, contributing to urban drainage and flood alleviation schemes. Moreover, the rate of release following heavy rainfall is slowed, reducing the problems associated with storm surges. With an increasing need for developments to have limited water run off, the Environment Agency now highlight the use of green roofing in their May 2003 publication “Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS) – an introduction” and the Agency have been supportive of supplementary planning documents which refer to green roofs – such as the Leeds Biodiversity and Waterfront Development SPD (2005).


Guidance



Water Management




SE 0.7

SW N/A

EoE 1.0

WM N/A

EM N/A

NW 0.7

NE N/A

LON 0.8

Y&H N/A


Guidance


CE4 – Heat Island No National SML ALL

Design Principles


Aim

To reduce heat absorption within the development thus reducing the incidence of overheating and the need for powered cooling:

• Is the development designed to reduce the heat gain in the fabric of buildings and in public spaces?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence is provided to demonstrate that the development seeks to reduce the likelihood of contributing to the heat island effect through the provision of shaded public spaces and footpaths.

2 (Good)

Where evidence is provided to demonstrate that, in addition to the first credit, the development seeks to reduce the likelihood of contributing to the heat island effect by achieving three (3) of the items listed below:

a) Provision of appropriate shaded green space and tree cover

b) Green roofs and vegetated walls

c) Design to enable air-flow throughout the development

d) Open water and fountains in public spaces

e) Shaded public spaces and footpaths

f) Appropriate choice of external finishes designed to avoid heat absorption.

g) Site layout / orientation to maximise microclimatic cooling.

3 (Best) Where evidence is provided to demonstrate that the development seeks to reduce the likelihood of contributing to the heat island effect by achieving five (5) of the items listed above.

Please Note: Items A – G are not listed in priority order.


Guidance



Design Principles


Compliance requirements



1. The design team / client has provided confirmation that the design strategy includes the provision of shaded public spaces and footpaths.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The design team / client has provided confirmation that the design strategy addresses at least three (3) of the below points:

a) Provision of appropriate shaded green space and tree cover

b) Green roofs and vegetated walls

c) Design to enable air-flow throughout the development

d) Open water and fountains in public spaces

e) Shaded public spaces and footpaths

f) Appropriate choice of external finishes that are designedto avoid heat absorption

g) Site layout / orientation to maximise microclimatic cooling.


1. The design team / client has provided confirmation that the design strategy addresses five (5) of the items listed above.


Guidance



Design Principles


Compliance Notes

Demonstrating Compliance

The onus is on the design / project team to demonstrate to the assessor that heat island has been considered seriously within the design.

Fountains Fountains should be powered by a renewable energy source wherever possible.

Passive Solar design

This item deals with the design of buildings within the development. The most effective designs are based on the specific understanding of a building site's wind patterns, terrain, vegetation, solar exposure and other factors often requiring professional architectural services.

Key aspects of passive design include appropriate solar orientation, the use of thermal mass or external finishes to avoid heat absorption, and appropriate ventilation and window placement.

Buildings on the site should be orientated and scaled to minimise the risk of creating an urban heat island and reflect local climatic conditions to maximise natural cooling.

Design to enable air-flow throughout the development

This item aims to ensure adequate circulation of air within the development to avoid concentration of hot air. How the design team / client lays out the buildings, chooses materials, defines details and participates in the construction process will influence the nature of air movement / flow in the development.

The design team / client should examine how air flow can be influenced by how the building is sited, how the buildings are arranged (or oriented), what possible envelope compositions might be used, and what organisational features may be employed. Climatic (and microclimatic) information about a proposed development should be examined to determine wind directions, velocities, and frequencies of occurrence.

Vegetation types and locations, topographical forms, and nearby buildings should be noted. Then data about wind flow, vegetation presence, ground forms, and existing buildings should be considered to see if wind shielding can occur and might reduce infiltration heat loss.


Guidance



Design Principles


External finishes to avoid heat absorption

Care should be taken to avoid the use of surface finishes with low levels of reflectance and emissivity, as radiant absorption of such coatings is far greater than those designed specifically to offer good levels of reflectance and emissivity (such as elastomeric coatings or light coloured roofing membranes which can both achieve high Solar Reflectance Index figures). This is applicable to any surface in the development, i.e. roofs, external walls and hard surfacing.

Public spaces The design strategy must include well designed and shaded communal open spaces which accommodate a range of recreational facilities for all age groups.

Footpaths The footpath system must facilitate pedestrian movement within the site, between the site and the existing built up area and surrounding countryside.

Compliance The onus is on the design / project team to demonstrate to the assessor that the heat island effect has been considered seriously within the design.

Equivalent alternatives

When some of the design measures listed in the compliance requirements are deemed inappropriate for the development, alternatives may be acceptable if the design team / client can demonstrate that their benefit is equivalent.


Guidance



Design Principles




First Credit

Req. 1 Marked up site drawings and specifications* outlining where and how shaded public space and footpaths will be provided.

* or written confirmation from the developer of the proposed measures.

OR

Written confirmation from the design team outlining where and how shaded public space and footpaths will be provided.

As for Outline Planning Stage

AND

A copy of the simulation report for the sustainable design of buildings confirming:

• Adoption of shaded public spaces and footpaths

• Reduction in the heat island effect.

Second Credit

Req. 1 Marked up drawings and specifications* outlining at least three measures taken to combat the Urban Heat Island effect.



AND


• Measures adopted


Third Credit

Req. 1 Marked up drawings and specifications* outlining at least five measures taken to combat the Urban Heat Island effect.



AND



Guidance



Design Principles


• Measures adopted.


Guidance Notes

Energy Management Plan: Presentation of compliance requirements for the Issue could be addressed under a broader energy strategy or energy management plan.


On warm summer days, the air in urban areas can be 6-8°F hotter than surrounding areas. Scientists call these areas "urban heat islands”.

The formation of a heat island is the result of the interaction of the following factors:

• The release (and reflection) of heat from industrial and domestic buildings;

• The absorption by concrete, brick and tarmac of heat during the day, and its release into the lower atmosphere at night;

• The reflection of solar radiation by glass buildings and windows, increasing an urban area’s albedo rate;

• The emission of hygroscopic pollutants from cars and heavy industry – these acts as condensation nuclei, leading to the formation of cloud and smog, which can trap radiation. In some cases, a pollution dome can also build up;

• The absence of vegetation that would provide shade and cool the air;

• The relative absence of water in urban areas means that less energy is used for evapotranspiration and more is available to heat the lower atmosphere; and

• The absence of strong winds to both disperse the heat and bring in cooler air from rural and suburban areas. Urban heat islands are generated by impervious hard landscaping.

The consequences are higher temperatures, increased use of air conditioning and raised pollution levels, in particular smog which is created by photochemical reactions of pollutants in the air. These reactions are more likely to occur and intensify at higher temperatures.

Ways to mitigate the heat island effect as well as to save energy include cool roofs, cool pavements, and vegetation. As well as reduce the temperature, these measures conserve


Guidance



Design Principles


energy and improve air quality. Additional benefits also include more durability of the materials.

Glossary of Terms

Albedo: the ratio of the amount of radiation reflected from an object's surface compared to the amount that strikes it. This varies according to the texture, colour and expanse of the object's surface and is reported in percentage. Surfaces with high albedo include sand and snow, while low albedo rates include forests and freshly turned earth.

Emittance: The emittance of a material refers to its ability to release absorbed heat. Scientists use a number between 0 and 1, or 0% and 100%, to express emittance. With the exception of metals, most construction materials have emittance above 0.85 (85%).

Heat absorption: the transformation of radiant energy into a different form of energy, usually heat, as it passes through a medium.

Heat Island: is an urban area which is significantly warmer than its surrounding rural areas. Principle areas contributing are roofs, pavements, car parks and buildings.

Hygroscopic pollutants: pollutants that are capable of attracting water vapour from the air.

Impervious Surfaces: surfaces that have a porosity of <50% eg pavements, car parks etc.

Passive solar design: this refers to the use of the sun's energy for the heating and cooling of living spaces. In this approach, the building itself or some element of it takes advantage of natural energy characteristics in materials and air created by exposure to the sun. Passive systems are simple, have few moving parts, and require minimal maintenance and require no mechanical systems.

Porosity: refers to the degree of barrier a surface exhibits to fluids, including organic, inorganic, animate or inanimate.

Surface Reflectance Index: a measure of how hot a surface will get when exposed to full sun. Measured on a scale of 0 for a standard black surface to 100 for a standards white surface. Materials with the highest SRI are the coolest and the most appropriate choice for mitigating the heat island effect.

Thermal mass: refers to materials such as masonry and water that can store heat energy for extended time. Thermal mass will prevent rapid temperature fluctuations. Thermal chimneys create or reinforce the effect hot air rising to induce air movement for cooling purposes.


Guidance



Design Principles




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.9

EM 0.9

NW 0.7

NE 0.6

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.6


Guidance


CE5 – Energy Efficiency Yes National SML ALL

Energy Management


Aim

To increase the overall efficiency of the development through energy efficient design and management:

• What steps have been taken to prepare an energy strategy for the proposed development to optimise energy consumption on the site?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where evidence is provided to demonstrate that an energy strategy will be developed for the proposed development to optimise the incorporation of energy efficiency measures into the buildings on the site – including as a minimum:

a) Minimising energy demand for the site through orientation and passive solar design.

b) Maximising the thermal efficiency of building envelopes.

c) Minimising consumption of energy used for water heating, space heating and cooling, lighting and power in individual buildings through efficient equipment and controls.

2 (Good)

In addition to the optimising the energy efficiency of all buildings on site, a feasibility study will be conducted to:

d) Calculate the residual energy demand for the site.

e) Maximise the amount of the residual demand which can be met efficiently by Low or Zero Carbon (LZC) technologies.

3 (Best)

Once the first and second credit have been achieved, the energy strategy will aim to:

f) Meet the remaining demand through an appropriate Allowable Solution (as defined by current government policy).


Guidance



Energy Management





1. An energy strategy will be developed for the proposed development.

2. An independent energy specialist will be appointed to advice on the development of the energy strategy.

3. The energy strategy will focus as a minimum on:

• Minimising energy demand for the site through orientation and passive solar design.

• Maximising the thermal efficiency of building envelopes through the use of (as a minimum):

• thermal mass

• high levels of insulation

• good levels of air tightness

• avoidance of cold bridging.

Minimising demand for water heating, space heating and cooling, lighting and power in individual buildings through efficient equipment and controls including the use of passive pre-heating or cooling of fresh air in order to reduce heating or cooling loads mechanical ventilation with heat recovery.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Where, in addition to the items listed above, a feasibility study has been carried out as part of the energy strategy to establish the most appropriate LZC energy technologies able to meet a proportion of the residual demand for the development (credits are awarded for the scale of this proportion within the Third Credit requirement as well as the CE6 Issue).


Guidance



Energy Management



1. Where, in addition to the items listed above, the energy strategy will demonstrate the development aims to meet the remaining demand through the use of an appropriate Allowable Solution.

OR

The entire residual demand is met by LZC energy technologies and the development is designed to be at least carbon neutral (as demonstrated by the output of approved site-wide energy modelling software).

Compliance Notes

Energy strategy A study carried out by an independent energy specialist to establish the most effective use and appropriate sources of energy for a development.

It is recommended that the energy strategy is be carried out no later than at the outline proposal stage, Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) stage C.

Independent energy specialist

An individual who:

• has acquired substantial expertise or a recognized qualification for undertaking assessments, designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions;

• is not professionally connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer.

Feasibility study A study carried out by an independent energy specialist to establish the most appropriate LZC energy source for a building or development.

The feasibility study must cover as a minimum:

• Energy generated from LZC energy source per year.

• Payback.


Guidance



Energy Management


• Land use.

• Local planning requirements.

• Noise.

• Whole life cost and lifecycle impact of the potential specification in terms of carbon emissions.

• Any available grants.

• All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the development.

• Reasons for excluding other technologies.

Approved site-wide energy modelling software

A range of dynamic simulation tools are available to simulate and report upon the site-wide energy requirements and associated carbon emissions of new developments at an early stage in the design process. These help to accurately forecast the energy demand of development once built as well as well as the output of the various energy solutions proposed. Examples of compliant site-wide energy modelling software include BRE’s Climate Lite tool or C-Plan by ecsc. Please contact the BRE when selecting an approved energy model for the project.

Calculations may also be performed using draft figures from SAP and SBEM ratings (these can be obtained by modelling a number of representative building types based on a developer’s standard specification or by using existing ratings already calculated for existing developments with similar building types.

Low or Zero Carbon (LZC) technologies

The installation of Low or Zero Carbon Energy technologies which supply development with heat and / or electricity through a direct connection to buildings. These installations can be located on / in the buildings or elsewhere on the site curtilage.

These can be small scale LZC technologies integrated in to the fabric of the home, community based LZC technologies located within the development and directly connected LZC heat (not necessarily generated on-site). A full list of compliant LZC technologies is given below.


Guidance



Energy Management


LZC heat

These installations can be located off-site provided heat is fed to the development by a direct physical connection to the development.

Compliant LZC technologies

Technologies eligible to contribute to achieving the requirements of this issue must produce energy from renewable sources and meet all other ancillary requirements as defined by Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources and amending and subsequently repealing Directives 2001/77/EC and 2003/30/EC. According to EU Directive 2009/28/EC ‘Energy from renewable sources’ means energy from renewable, non-fossil sources namely wind, solar, aerothermal, geothermal, hydrothermal and ocean energy, hydropower, landfill gas, sewage treatment plant gas and biogases. Provided all other requirements are met (MCS/CHPQA certification where applicable and the system can be modelled using building regulation compliant software) the following technologies are eligible to contribute to performance against issue CE5 (note that this list will be updated on an ongoing basis to ensure alignment with the EU Directive and emerging technologies):

• Solar Photovoltaic (PV)

• Solar Thermal Water Heating

• Small and Micro Wind Turbines

• Small Scale Hydro Electric Generators

• Biomass (Solid) Fuelled Heating

• Biofuel (Liquid) Fuelled Heating (Note: Appliances able to use mineral oil or liquid biofuel are subject to the same emissions factor as those only able to use mineral oil only in SAP 2009. Therefore, no advantage would be gained from using an appliance of this type when assessing performance against the requirements of CE5).


Guidance



Energy Management


• Biogas (Gas) Fuelled Heating (Note: The EU directive sets out minimum requirements related to the responsible sourcing of first generation biofuel. However, at the time of writing there is no recognised method to demonstrate that these requirements have been met. Until a method is available the ancillary requirements applicable to the responsible sourcing of first generation biofuel do not apply when assessing compliance with issue Ce5).

• Air/Ground/Water Source Heat Pumps (Note: The EU Directive sets out minimum efficiency requirements for heat pumps. However, at the time of writing there is no published methodology to calculate the Seasonal Performance Factor (SPF) required to assess efficiency. Until the calculation is available no minimum efficiency requirements, apart from those defined by the MCS scheme, apply to heat pumps).

• Gas Fuelled CHP

LZC technology

not listed

Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are not inherently considered as LZC technologies. Acceptability will be dependent on the nature of the system proposed. The BREEAM Assessor must confirm acceptability with BRE if in doubt with confirmation received in writing from BRE Global for credits to be awarded.

Waste incineration

Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as a low carbon for the purpose of this Issue under the following circumstances:

All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the feasibility study.

And Either

The Local Authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste management policies.

Or

A near or onsite facility connected to the building, via a private wire arrangement, which demonstrably removes re-usable and recyclable waste material prior to incineration.


Guidance



Energy Management


Biofuels Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food production and green house gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstock’s e.g. biofuels manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. BREEAM will recognise systems using second generation biofuels (see relevant definitions) or biofuels manufactured from biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, or locally and sustainably sourced solid biofuels.

Remote and off-site sources

With the exception of directly connected heat, LZC energy supplied from remote or off-site sources through the National Grid cannot be considered under the second credit. This includes electricity procured through ‘Green Tariffs’.

Where energy is delivered through a ‘private wire’ this can be included within this credit, but the technology MUST take precedent over energy delivered through the National Grid.

Green Tariffs Energy supplied from remote sources through the National Grid is not eligible to contribute towards achieving the requirements set out in this issue. This includes electricity procured through ‘green tariffs’.

Direct Supply

The carbon benefit of energy generated by low or zero carbon technologies can only be allocated to dwellings that are directly supplied by the installation via dedicated supplies. Where electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the dwelling(s), it may be fed back to the National Grid. The carbon benefit of any electricity fed back to the grid can be allocated as if it were consumed in the dwelling(s) when assessing performance against the requirements of this issue. For communal PV arrays in buildings with multiple dwellings, the obligations of this definition are satisfied where the requirements of Appendix M of SAP are met.

More than one technology

Compliance for both good and best practise standards can be gained using more than one of the above technologies for either credit.


Guidance



Energy Management


(MCS) Microgeneration Certification Scheme

The Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) is an independent scheme that certifies microgeneration products and installers in accordance with consistent standards. It is designed to evaluate microgeneration products and installers against robust criteria, and provides consumers with an independent indication of the reliability of products, assurance that the installation will be carried out to the appropriate standard and a route for complaints should there be any issues. The MCS is a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accredited certification scheme covering all microgeneration products and services. It has support from the Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC), industry and non-governmental groups as a prime method for making a substantial contribution to cutting the UK’s dependency on fossil fuels and carbon dioxide emissions.

Compliance with CE6

Please note that the requirement for CE6 is to deliver, as a Minimum – Mandatory requirement, 15% of the developments energy demand through renewable sources. This Credit specifically targets the reduction in energy demand through passive means.


Guidance



Energy Management




First Credit

Req. 1, 2 & 3

A copy of the specification clauses or letter from the design team / client confirming:

• An energy strategy will be developed for the site

• An independent energy specialist will be appointed to advise the design team/client in developing the energy strategy.

• Scope of the strategy

• Detail of the energy efficiency measures that will be adopted.

A copy of a completed energy strategy for the development site, addressing the specific compliance requirements to achieve 1 Credit.

Second Credit

Req. 1, 2 & 3

As for first credit but with specification clauses or letter from the design team / client confirming that a feasibility study will be carried out by an independent energy specialist to determine the appropriate LZC energy source(s) for the development.

A copy of a completed feasibility study (within energy strategy) for the development site, addressing the specific compliance requirements to achieve 2 Credits.

Third Credit

Req. 1, 2 & 3

As for first and second credit but with specification clauses or letter from the design team / client confirming:

• Details of the of the allowable

A copy of a completed energy strategy for the development site, addressing the specific compliance requirements to achieve 3 Credits.


Guidance



Energy Management


solutions that will be adopted

• Commitment to use LZC energy technologies to meet entire residual demand.

Guidance Notes

Carbon neutral: Where net carbon dioxide emissions resulting from energy consumed in the operation of building’s space heating / cooling, hot-water systems, ventilation and internal lighting is zero or better. Where developments are designed to be true zero carbon (where net carbon dioxide emissions resulting from energy consumed in the operation of the space heating / cooling, hot-water systems, ventilation, internal lighting AND process related energy consumption is zero or better), an application for innovation credits can be made.

Energy Management Plan: Presentation of compliance requirements for the Issue could be addressed under a broader energy strategy or energy management plan.


The CE5 Issue has been written to encourage the production of Energy Strategies that complement the hierarchical approach to delivering zero carbon development.

It is essential to note that at the time this Issue was written, the Zero Carbon Homes and Non-Domestic Buildings Consultation was open and a Zero Carbon Definition had not been finalised. Therefore, the Issue’s requirements summarise the current government stance and, for allowable solutions in particular, are subject to change.

As such, energy consultants and BREEAM Assessors should make recommendations in line with the most current thinking and confirm with BRE Global whenever awarding the third credit.


Guidance



Energy Management


Glossary of Terms

ESCO: An Energy Service Company.

First and second generation biofuels: first generation biofuels are biofuels made from sugar, starch, vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional technology. Second generation biofuels are biofuels from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced technical processes. Common first generation biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalchols.

Payback period: The period of time needed for the return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment

Residual energy demand: this refers to the energy demand after energy efficiency measures have been integrated.

Thermal mass: Thermal mass is the ability of a material to absorb heat. Using the thermal mass of a building is an effective and efficient way to maintain comfortable and stable temperatures, plus it's a low energy solution with reduced environmental impact.

Whole life cost: The whole-life costs of a facility are the costs of acquiring it (including consultancy, design and construction costs, and equipment), the costs of operating it and the costs of maintaining it over its whole life through to its disposal; i.e. the total ownership costs.

These costs include internal resources and departmental overheads, where relevant; they also include risk allowances as required; flexibility (predicted alterations for known change in business requirements, for example), refurbishment costs and the costs relating to sustainability and health and safety aspects.


Guidance



Energy Management




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 1.0

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


CE6 – Onsite Renewable(s) Yes National SML ALL

Energy Management


Aim

To promote the increased use of renewable energy sources to reduce dependence on fossil fuels producing CO2 emissions:

• What percentage of total site energy demand will be produced by Low or Zero Carbon energy technologies?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where there is a commitment to install Low or Zero Carbon energy technologies to provide a net contribution of at least 15% of the total building (site) energy demand (kWh/m2).

2 (Good) Where there is a commitment to install Low or Zero Carbon energy technologies to provide a net contribution of at least 20% of the total building (site) energy demand (kWh/m2).

3 (Best) Where there is a commitment to install Low or Zero Carbon energy technologies to provide a net contribution of at least 25% of the total building (site) energy demand (kWh/m2) or greater.




• where there is a commitment to install Low or Zero Carbon energy technologies to provide a net contribution of at least 15% of the development’s total building energy demand (kWh/m2).


Guidance



Energy Management


Two Credits (Good);




AND

1. An independent energy specialist will be appointed to provide a feasibility study identifying the most appropriate LZC technologies to install for the development.

2. Figures used for calculations of the percentage carbon reduction provided by LZC technology are based on the output from approved site-wide energy modelling software.

Compliance Notes

Low or Zero Carbon (LZC) technologies

Please refer to CE5.

Compliant LZC technologies




More than one technology

The percentage can be made up from more than one LZC technology.


Guidance



Energy Management


Approved site-wide energy modelling software


Process related energy

For the purpose of the Issue, Energy use by public infrastructure and other structures (e.g. street lighting, car parks, bus shelter etc) can be disregarded from the assessment. Only energy used by fixed building services need be considered. Fixed building services include:

• Fixed internal or external lighting excluding emergency escape lighting or specialist process lighting.

• Fixed systems for heating, hot water service, air conditioning or mechanical ventilation.

Process related energy can be excluded from the total energy demand for the development when calculating the percentage of energy provided by LZC technologies. For example energy required for catering facilities or laundry equipment.

Energy Use / consumption

As above, this Credit relates ONLY to building level energy consumption. Where possible this should be generated onsite.

Where developers are using an off-site renewable energy assessors must contact BRE Global to see whether this would be eligible for inclusion in this criteria.


Guidance



Energy Management




First Credit

Req. 1 A copy of the specification clauses or letter from the design team / client confirming:

• Target net contribution of the LZC technologies as a percentage of overall demand (to be at least 15%).



• An independent energy specialist will be appointed

A copy of a feasibility study completed by an independent energy specialist, used to determine the most appropriate LZC energy sources for the development.


• An approved energy modelling software will be used.

Copy of a report from the completion of an approved energy model of the development site demonstrating LZC output sufficient to meet 15% of the development’s overall building demand (fixed building services only).

Second Credit





Guidance



Energy Management


Req. 2 As for first credit. As for first credit.

Req. 3 As for first credit. As for first credit but demonstrating compliance with the second credit performance target.

Third Credit

Req. 1





Req. 3 As for first credit. As for first credit but demonstrating compliance with the third credit performance target.

Guidance Notes

Figures used for calculations of the percentage of energy provided by low or zero carbon energy technologies should be based on the output of approved site-wide energy modelling software.

The output of this software should include the anticipated annual energy production from any LZC energy sources and compare this with a baseline total annual energy demand for the development.

Any electricity from an LZC energy technology that is exported to the grid at times of low demand in the development may be included in the calculation as if it was used within the development (provided that there is a direct supply to the development in times of demand).

Energy from remote sources such as the National Grid, will not comply, this includes electricity procured through ‘green tariffs’.


Guidance



Energy Management


Where the development under assessment forms part of a larger mixed use development and renewable generation is provided for the whole site then the amount of renewable energy counted for this credit should be proportional to the development’s energy demand compared to the total energy demand for the whole site.


The use of low or zero energy technologies will not only lead to reductions in carbon emissions and other pollutants, but will also help to conserve the finite global fossil fuel resources and develop a market for such technologies.

The government has set a target that 10% of energy in the UK should be generated from renewable sources by 2010. This target will be to achieve as more developments obtain 15% or more of their energy from renewable sources.

Glossary of Terms



Guidance



Energy Management




SE 0.9

SW N/A

EoE 0.8

WM 0.9

EM 0.9

NW 0.9

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance


CE7 – Future Renewables No National ML ALL

Energy Management


Aim

To encourage the future use of active solar technologies where they are not originally supplied:

• What percentage of buildings in the development not intended to be fitted with active solar devices (PV and thermal) by the developer will be designed to allow future installation by the occupier?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where 40% of buildings not already connected to active solar devices will be designed to allow future installation by the occupier.

2 (Good) Where 60% of buildings not already connected to active solar devices will be designed to allow future installation by the occupier.

3 (Best) Where 80% of buildings not already connected to active solar devices will be designed to allow future installation by the occupier.




• where 40% of buildings not already connected to active solar devices will be designed to allow future installation by the occupier.

Two Credits (Good);

• where 60% of buildings not already connected to active solar devices will be designed to allow future installation by the occupier.


Guidance



Energy Management



• Where 80% of buildings not already connected to active solar devices will be designed to allow future installation by the occupier.

1. An independent energy specialist is appointed to advise on how to integrate into building design the capability to install active solar devices after construction. Guidance should be contained within the energy strategy recognised by the CE5 Issue.

2. Suitable design features are specified to allow future installation of active solar devices. These must include, but not be limited to:

a) Orientation and tilt angle of the roof.

b) Building structure allowing for additional roof loads.

c) Appropriate building form to simplify the incorporation of equipment into the structure.

d) Passive solar techniques.

e) Proper space planning to optimise the distribution systems related to solar equipment use (piping, wiring, etc).

f) Adaptable building services e.g. acceptable heat exchangers, space for the storage tank, adequate wiring and water supplies.

g) Aesthetic considerations to allow integration of the solar devices into the building’s appearance.


Guidance



Energy Management


Compliance Notes



Compliance The onus is on the design / project team to demonstrate to the assessor that future installation of active solar devices has been considered seriously within the design.


Guidance



Energy Management




First Credit


• Percentage of buildings designed to allow future installation of active solar devices by the occupier (to be at least 40%).


AND

Marked-up proposed site plan highlighting buildings with and without provision for future installation of active solar devices.

AND

Calculations demonstrating the percentage of buildings on proposed site plan with provision for future installation of active solar devices.


• An independent energy specialist will be appointed.

Specification or drawings confirming sustainable features necessary for the future installation of active solar devices.


• The independent specialist will be required to give guidance on the sustainable design features necessary for retrofitting of active solar devices.

Section of Energy Strategy setting out independent energy specialist’s advice on the sustainable design features necessary to for the future installation of active solar devices.


Guidance



Energy Management


Second Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit but with:

• Percentage of buildings designed to allow future installation of active solar devices by the occupier to be at least 60%.

As for first credit but demonstrating compliance with the second credit performance target.



Third Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit but with:

• Percentage of buildings designed to allow future installation of active solar devices by the occupier to be at least 80%.

As for first credit but demonstrating compliance with the third credit performance target.



Guidance Notes

None


Guidance



Energy Management


Additional information

Active solar technologies: Active solar technologies usually consist of a solar collecting device that is designed to capture the sun’s energy and transfer it to either heat water through the use of solar water panels or to generate electricity through the use of photovoltaic panels. The use of these forms of intermediate equipment and devices can provide a flexible means of energy gain. Unlike passive solar technologies there is usually a moving part of the system involved with active solar technologies, hence the word active, usually a pump type device.

Glossary of Terms

Active solar devices: Active solar devices include solar photovoltaic (PV) and solar hot water systems.

Orientation: Maximum performance of solar equipment is based on continued exposure to the sun. Outputs are optimised when there is clear connection to the sun for the entirety of daylight hours the more exposure to the sun, the more water can be heated, the more electricity generate, and the more heat can be generated for comfort. Buildings’ roofs should therefore be facing south and be free of shade, for the entirety of daylight hours.

Tilt angle: Solar water heating is most effective when it can provide hot water under coldest conditions i.e. winter. The winter sun is lower on the horizon so the ideal angle of a collector should be between 35 and 45°.

Proper space planning: Location of equipment is a critical consideration. Placement optimises conditions by having short runs of delivery - water heated by a solar collector should have as short a run to the storage and / or use as possible to minimize transfer heat losses. Electrical installations benefit from short delivery systems. Reduced runs mean less material, less labour and materials for installation, less maintenance in the future, and less overall cost.

Passive solar techniques: A well-designed and insulated home that incorporates passive solar heating techniques will require a smaller and less costly heating system of any type, and may need very little supplemental heat other than solar.

Examples of passive solar techniques that can help with the integration of solar active devices include:

• Axial elongation of the building along the East / West axis to provide more southern exposure;

• Roof forms and/or elements which incorporate solar equipment and strategies e.g. avoidance of protrusions;


Guidance



Energy Management


• Specifically calculated overhangs to protect from summer sun high in the sky while allowing for the access of lower angle winter sun;

• Colours and textures which enhance taking advantage or mitigating conditions.


Guidance



Energy Management




SE 0.9

SW N/A

EoE 1.0

WM 0.9

EM 0.9

NW N/A

NE 1.0

LON 1.0

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


CE8 – Services No National SML ALL

Infrastructure


Aim

To provide easy access to site service and communications infrastructure, with minimal disruption and need for reconstruction, and allowing for future growth in services:

• Will site heating / cooling / power / water / sewerage and communications infrastructure running through the public realm be designed for easy access and allows for the future expansion of services?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence is provided to demonstrate that a single point of access is provided for each service running through the public realm.

2 (Good) Where, in addition to the above, access to the services is provided away from footpaths, cycle ways or roads to allow minimal disruption for maintenance and upgrade.

3 (Best) Where, in addition to the above, additional ducting is provided to allow for future expansion of services.




1. Provision of a single point of access for each service running through the site.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Access to the service(s) is provided away from any circulation routes on site.


Guidance



Infrastructure


Third credit (Best);

1. Additional ducting is provided in addition to the necessary capacity to allow for future expansion of services.

Compliance Notes

Scope of services For the purposes of this Issue, services include heating, cooling, power, water, sewerage and communications. Any additional subterranean services that the assessor feels should be located away from public areas should be included in this assessment.

Please Note: this includes any service that will require maintenance repair.

Single point of access

The requirement is to make sure that maintenance can be provided in one place for each service for the site. As such major junctions / service points should be located in a manner that reduces disruption to peoples movement within the development site.

Single points of access should be provided at the building / plot level. BRE Global DO NOT require a single point of access for services entering the site but these should be located in a manner to reduce disruption to peoples movement and for ease of access.

Circulation routes Circulation route refers to any point on the development where the public have right of access, on foot or through other means. Services should be localted in such a way that should they require maintenance they cause the least possible disruption to peoples movement throughout the development, either by foot or any other means.


Guidance



Infrastructure




First Credit

Req. 1 • Preliminary documentation from individual service providers demonstrating the commitment to the provision of the Issue requirements:

• Marked up site plans showing location of services and routes through the site

• In addition to the above marked access points which allow single point access


AND

Letter of commitment in regards to the installation of related infrastructure must be sort from the following service providers as a minimum:

• Gas.

• Electricity.

• Water / Sewage.

• Telecommunications / Internet Service Providers.

Second Credit

Req. 1 & 2

As for first and second credits but with preliminary documentation from individual service providers demonstrating the commitment to provide:

• Access to the network(s) for maintenance which will not severely interrupt customer supply.

• Marked up plans showing services planned route(s) in relation to public space / roadways / cycle routes / footpaths



Guidance



Infrastructure


Third Credit

Req. 1 As for second credit but with preliminary documentation from individual service providers demonstrating the commitment to:

• Provision for future growth.

As for second credit but demonstrating compliance with the third credit performance target.

Guidance Notes

Where feasible a single point of access for ALL services should be provided, If not then these services should be located in a way as to reduce disruption to users of the development. Where multiple access points are required these should again be located in way in which disruption to the flow of people / traffic is reduced.


BRE define footpath as any access or route designed for public access. It does not refer to any private access routes or access routes for a designated service i.e. substation located away from public areas.

In addition we understand that services may require maintenance anywhere along the ‘line’ in which they run. As such key junctions / points at which regular maintenance should be located away from the public realm, and the lines should not be centrally located within public access areas.

Glossary of Terms

None


Guidance



Infrastructure




SE 0.8

SW N/A

EoE 0.9

WM 0.9

EM 0.9

NW 0.6

NE 0.8

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.8


Guidance


CE9 – Water Consumption No National SML ALL

Water Resources Management


Aim

To reduce the overall consumption of clean water for non-potable uses:

• What is the target water consumption for the development site, across ALL internal uses?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum)

For domestic buildings:

• Where the developer has made a commitment to deliver ALL domestic buildings (units) with a target water consumption of 110 litres per day

OR

• Has specific design specifications that demonstrate domestic buildings (units) will be able to meet the 110 litres per day target.

For non-domestic buildings:

• Where the developer has made a commitment to deliver ALL non-domestic buildings (units) with a target of achieving one credit under BREEAM 2011.


Guidance





2 (Good)



OR



• Where the developer has made a commitment to deliver ALL non-domestic buildings (units) with a target of achieving three credits under BREEAM 2011.

3 (Best)


• Where the developer has made a commitment to deliver ALL domestic buildings (units) with a target water consumption of 80litres per day

OR



• Where the developer has made a commitment to deliver ALL non-domestic buildings (units) with a target of achieving five credits under BREEAM 2011.


Guidance







One Credit (Minimum); where design specifications / drawings or commitment from the developer confirming:



OR




Two Credits (Good); where design specifications / drawings or commitment from the developer confirming:



OR





Guidance





Three Credits (Best); where design specifications / drawings or commitment from the developer confirming:


• Where the developer has made a commitment to deliver ALL domestic buildings (units) with a target water consumption of 80litres per day

OR





Guidance





Compliance Notes

Potable water Drinking quality water that is taken from a connection to the main water supply in the building, which may be from the public water supply or from a private supply such as from groundwater via a borehole.

Grey water recycling

The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of used shower, bath, washing machine and tap water for use instead of potable water within the home or wider development. .

Target internal water consumption (non-domestic)

The target water consumption for non-domestic building(s) has been lifted from BREEAM Offices 2011.

Target internal water consumption (domestic)

The target internal water consumption for domestic homes has been set at the lower level for each CSH ‘tier’ to ensure consistency with Bld2.

Using greywater to meet irrigation and other process demands

Using greywater collection for WC / urinal flushing and washing machine consumption is the first priority. Where this demand is met, additional greywater resources can be used meet water demand for irrigation or building / operational processes.

Mix of uses Developers can demonstrate compliance with this credit through a mix of greywater and rainwater systems.

Communal water recycling scheme

Compliance with this Credit can be demonstrated through the use of community level water recycling schemes.


Guidance





Greywater and rainwater system data

The following information is required where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified: Rainwater: in accordance with BS8515 ‘intermediate approach’: a. Collection area (m2) b. Yield co-efficient (%) c. hydraulic filter efficiency (%) d. Rainfall (average mm/year) Rainwater: in accordance with BS8515 ‘detailed approach: a. Daily rainfall collection (litres) Greywater: in accordance with BS8525’/ Manufacturer or system designer details.

The percentage volume of waste water collected (and re-used) from the following (where relevant); wash hand basins, showers, kitchen basins, dishwashers, baths, washing machines and sources of waste water from non domestic components.

Calculation Method Assessors should refer to the BREEAM 2011 (WAT1 tool) and Code for Sustainable Homes Water Efficiency Calculator for New Dwellings tool (www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/watercalculator) to calculate the target water consumption for the development site.

Please refer to the latest CSH Technical Guidance Manual and / or BREEAM 2011 for guidance on how to meet building level requirements.

Please note that BREEAM assumes that the building classifications will be known prior to submission for planning. Commitment must be made to reduce water consumption in the buildings across the development, with firm commitment in place to demonstrate compliance.

http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1 Summary of the development’s commitments in regards to the following:



OR





Req. 2 Documentation confirming the development’s commitments.

• Letter (or written confirmation ) from the developer (client)

OR


AND

Specification or drawings confirming:

• How the water strategy for the development site will deliver the


Guidance





• Copy of overarching water resource management strategy or documentation providing details on how the project plans to reduce the overall consumption of mains potable water.

required water consumption targets.

Second Credit

Req. 1 & 2

Summary of the development’s commitments in regards to the following:



OR





AND


• How the water strategy for the development site will deliver the required water consumption targets.


Guidance





Third Credit

Req. 1 & 2



OR




As for first credit but demonstrating compliance with the third credit performance target.

AND


• How the water strategy for the development site will deliver the required water consumption targets.

.


No Additional Information


Guidance





Guidance Notes

Developers can use an integrated system of reduced flow rate(s), greywater and rainwater recycling to demonstrate compliance with this credit.

Glossary of Terms

No additional terms.


Guidance





Regional Weighting


SE 1.0

SW 0.8

EoE 0.8

WM 0.9

EM N/A

NW 0.8

NE 0.9

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.9


Guidance

Climate & Energy Mandatory Status Size Type CE10 - Design - Weather

Resilience No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Resilience


Aim

To ensure the development is resilient to the weather including expected future climate change impacts.

• Have new developments been designed to mitigate the expected impacts of forecast increased wind speeds and stronger rain events during the expected lifetime of the development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) The development has been designed to reduce the impact of adverse microclimatic conditions disrupting development users.

2 (Good) Exterior fittings (i.e. roof finishes, guttering, fencing etc) designed to withstand maximum predicted wind speeds and design features incorporated within the public realm to enhance comfort levels in development users.

3 (Best) As good practice and development designed to minimise overall impact on air flow through the site through wind breaks, orientation and aerodynamic design.




• The masterplan takes account of microclimatic design with specific mention of how the design meets the recommendations of the Urban Design Compendium.

• The developer has provided examples of how these features have been incorporated within the final masterplan.


Guidance



Resilience


Two Credits (Good);

1. Minimum has been achieved

AND

2. The developer has confirmed within relevant sections of a Design Guide or materials specification that the buildings have been designed to reduce their impact on the microclimate and to be resilient to future climate changes (i.e. heavy rainfall events / increased wind speeds).


1. Good has been achieved

AND

2. Where relevant a wind study has been conducted to ensure the development takes due account of the impact of wind on development users.


Guidance



Resilience


Compliance Notes

Microclimate Reference should be sought from the Urban Design Compendium’s recommendations on Microclimate: http://www.urbandesigncompendium.co.uk/public/documents/UDC1FULL.pdf

http://www.urbandesigncompendium.co.uk/public/documents/UDC1


Guidance



Resilience


Schedule of Evidence Requirements


First Credit

Req. 1

• The masterplan takes account of microclimatic design with specific mention of how the design meets the recommendations of the Urban Design Compendium in relation to microclimate.

• The developer has provided examples of how these features have been incorporated within the final masterplan, with specific reference to the Urban Design Compendium.

• This could include physical design features or natural / landscape design features incorporated within the design to maximise the quality of the public realm.

Req. 2

• Areas at risk of flooding and SUDs are designed to minimise the risk of overflow disrupting streets and peoples movements within the development.

• Site plans demonstrate that flood risk areas on site or areas designed to flood will not disrupt people movement. An allowance for climate change has been built in.

Second Credit

Req. 1

• Design guide developed for the site incorporates future proofing in design specification to minimise impacts of climate change on development site.

• Relevant sections from the design guide and specifications detailing how materials have been incorporated to allow for future proofing.

Req. 2

• Building orientation / design minimises impact of microclimatic changes with reference from the design team on how this has been achieved.

• As for Outline Planning PLUS schematic design showing wind directions and how the design responds to these and their impact on the public realm.


Guidance



Resilience


Third Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has committed to undertaking a microclimatic study to demonstrate that the development will not cause adverse conditions both within the development site and areas that surround the site.

• Evidence detailing that the study has been undertaken and any design alterations that were required as a result of the study.

Req. 2

• The study clearly demonstrates that the impact of wind within the development will not disrupt users unduly or impact on surrounding areas.


No additional information.


Guidance



Resilience




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance


CE11 – Sub / smart-metering No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Energy Monitoring


Aim

To enable development and building users to monitor their energy and water consumption:

• Will the development incorporate sub / smart-metering, allowing building and development users to monitor their energy and water consumption?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Sub-metering will be provided at the building / plot level to monitor end energy use at each building.

2 (Good) The building / plot developer will be required to provide appropriate sub-metering to individual units / tenants in a building.

3 (Best)

Smart metering will be installed within the development. In residential buildings standard displays will be provided to each dwelling.

In non-residential buildings interactive displays (including software or internet accessible displays) will be provided to enable the occupants to monitor and reduce their energy use at the industrial unit / tenant level.




1. Plot developers will be required to provide appropriate sub-metering (or equivalent) at the building level to monitor energy use.

OR

2. Where building types are unknown / plots are being developed by a third party they will be required to install sub-metering to monitor energy use at the plot level.

AND


Guidance



Energy Monitoring


3. All metering will be for each possible energy consuming use i.e. Domestic Hot Water, Cooling, etc.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Plot developers will be required to provide appropriate sub-meters to allow monitoring of the energy used by the individual residential and non-residential units / tenants.

AND

2. The sub-meters display relevant energy consumption data for each building.


1. Smart meters will be installed in ALL domestic and non-domestic buildings.

AND

2. Provision of interactive user-friendly displays at key locations in non-residential building(s) showing real-time energy use, in an understandable graphical format, to enable the occupants to monitor and reduce their energy use

AND

3. An occupant Information Pack shall be provided which complies with at least the ‘Minimum’ standard of COM3 – Occupant Information Pack. The pack shall include a set of general recommendations for reducing the energy use with the help of smart meters and best practice case studies from elsewhere.


Guidance



Energy Monitoring


Compliance Notes

Sub Metering Sub meters installed on site should provide information on water, gas (where applicable) and electricity consumption. This should be at the plot level, and where buildings are to be multi-occupancy a commitment should be made to install tenancy sub-meters.

This is across both domestic and non-domestic buildings.

Smart Metering Smart metering allows for live reporting on energy consumption. In residential buildings standard smart meters should be installed. In non-residential buildings there should be commitment in place to provide live displays on energy so as to increase awareness of consumption.


Guidance



Energy Monitoring




First Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has committed to install sub-meters within the development site to allow building owners / occupiers to monitor energy consumption.

• Plot developers will be required to provide appropriate smart sub-meters (or equivalent) Building Management Systems (BMS) at the building level to monitor energy use.

OR

• Where building types are unknown / plots are being developed by a third party they will be required to install sub-meters to monitor energy use at the plot level.

Req. 2

• Examples of sub-meters that will be installed are provided

• All meters are labelled with the end energy consuming use i.e. Domestic Hot Water, Cooling, etc.

Second Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has committed to install sub-meters within the development site at the plot and / or building level to allow building owners / occupiers to monitor energy consumption.

• Evidence demonstrates that the developer has committed to installing sub-meters at the plot level.

• Where relevant these will also include tenancy level sub-meters, or firm commitments are in place to ensure individual tenanted areas will have relevant sub-metering.

Req. 2

• Where it is known that buildings will be under multiple ownership / occupancy the developer must commit to install relevant sub-metering.

• These will provide details on water, electricity and gas (where used for heating / commercial cooking) consumption.


Guidance



Energy Monitoring


Third Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has committed to installing smart meters in ALL buildings on site.

• Examples of the smart-meters that will be installed are provided with confirmation from relevant service providers that the information will be reported to residents in domestic units.

Req. 2

• Where relevant indicative designs of displays / examples of displays to be installed have been provided.

• Examples of the type / manufacturer of smart meters have been provided.

• Commitments from developers to install displays in prominent public access areas with non-domestic buildings.

• Where building types are unknown / designs not yet developed commitment from the landowner / holding company that developers will be required to install such displays within non-domestic buildings, displaying relevant information to building occupants / visitors.

Req. 3

• An occupant Information Pack has been provided that meets the ‘Minimum’ standard of COM3 – Occupant Information Pack. The pack shall include a set of general recommendations for reducing the energy use with the help of smart meters and best practice case studies from elsewhere.

• An occupant Information Pack has been provided that meets the ‘Minimum’ standard of COM3 – Occupant Information Pack. The pack shall include a set of general recommendations for reducing the energy use with the help of smart meters and best practice case studies from elsewhere.




Guidance



Energy Monitoring




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Resources


Guidance

Resources Mandatory Status Size Type

RES1 - Low Impact Yes National SML ALL

Materials


Aim

To increase the volume of low environmental impact materials used during the construction of developments:

• What proportion (by volume – m3) of building materials used in the construction of the public realm and infrastructure will be specified as having low environmental impact?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where evidence can demonstrate that the development has committed to using between 40 - 60% of the material used on site is A+ - B rated, according to the Green Guide to Specification.

2 (Good) Where evidence can demonstrate that the development has committed to using between 60 - 80% of the material used on site is A+ - B rated, according to the Green Guide to Specification.

3 (Best)

Where evidence can demonstrate that the development has committed to using between >80% of the material used on site is A+ - B rated, according to the Green Guide to Specification.

AND

Contractors and Sub-contractors have (or will have) environmental management policies and procedures in place to ensure the sustainable management and supply of materials.


Guidance



Materials





1. Where 40 - 60% of the materials on site achieve an A+ - B rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Where 60 - 80% of the materials on site achieve an A+ - B rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification.


1. Where greater than 80% of the materials on site achieve an A+ - B rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification.

2. Where evidence provided demonstrates that Contractors and Sub-contractors have (or will have) environmental management policies and procedures in place to ensure the sustainable management and supply of materials.


Guidance



Materials


Compliance Notes

Green Guide ratings

Green Guide ratings for the specification(s) of each element can be found online at :www.thegreenguide.org.uk

Matching specifications to those in the Green Guide

When using the Green Guide, whilst exact matches are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment. Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from BRE for the appropriate rating. Reused materials are those that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials).

Public Realm / On site

This credit relates only to materials used in the public realm AND NOT in the buildings themselves. The ‘public realm’ is classed as all areas accessible by the public and those that are external to the building cartilage.

Where building types are unknown commitment must be made to specify low environmental impact materials in the landscaping / infrastructure at a PLOT level.

http://www.thegreenguide.org.uk


Guidance



Materials




First Credit


• A commitment to achieve a 40 – 60% targets for materials Green Guide A+ - B rated.

As for Outlined Planning Stage.

AND

Master plan outline on location and area of each applicable element.

Second Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit but with a commitment to meet 60 – 80% target.

As for first credit but with performance demonstrated at the 60 – 80% target.

Third Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit but with a commitment to >80% target.

As for first credit but with performance demonstrated at the >80% target.


• Commitment to using contractors and sub-contractors who have EMAS / ISO14001 sourcing policy and procedures.

Copy of documentation (e.g. tender specification) that confirms that the developer has committed to using contractors and sub-contractors who have EMAS / ISO14001 responsible management and sourcing policy and procedures.

OR

Commitment from the developer to ensure contractors and sub-contractors sign up to a lead contractors EMAS / ISO14001 approved management system.


Guidance



Materials


Guidance Notes

Please Note: the credit aim is to embed more sustainable materials into development proposals. It is assessed using a m3 basis so that developers can demonstrate on their plans where more sustainable materials can be incorporated and the anticipated volume of material(s) they anticipate they will require.


The production, use and disposal of building materials accounts for significant quantities of energy and resources, both internationally and within the UK, the Green Guide provides a simple tool to aid specifiers in considering the environmental implications of their choices. The Green Guide and the publication of the BRE methodology for environmental profiles of constructions materials, components and buildings (Howard et al, 1999) are based on life cycle assessment (LCA), an approach which measures and assesses a range of environmental impacts form “cradle to grave”. The Green Guide uses LCA data gathered from the majority of UK construction products’ trade associations.

The Green Guide applies a weighting system to calculate a summary score on a scale form A+ to E, with A+ rated specifications having the lowest overall environmental impact. It is these summary Green Guide ratings the BREEAM: Communities considers for the criteria in this issue. Building materials and their components are presented in their typical As Built elemental form. They are compared on a like for like basis, as specifications that fulfil similar functions. The specifications are compared over a sixty year environmental profiling study period. Included in this is any repair and maintenance over the sixty year study period, and impacts relating to an assumed dismantling/demolition of the building at the end of its life which may occur at any point after sixty years.

Responsible sourcing of materials is based on the fundamental principles of life cycle stewardship which is at the heart of the Brundtland definition (Brundtland, 1987) of sustainable development as “development which meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs”. This means that the consequences and impacts of using materials must be considered from the point at which they are mined or harvested in their raw state, through the manufacture and processing, through use, reuse and recycling, until their final disposal as waste with no further value.

Responsible sourcing of materials has environmental, social and economic dimensions. Supply chain management and material stewardship are essential elements of responsible sourcing. Certification by independent, licensed competent bodies confirms compliance with the required standards.


Guidance



Materials


Glossary of Terms

Green Guide to Specification: simple 'green guide' to the environmental impacts of building materials

FSC: Forestry Standards Commission

CSA: Canadian Standards Association

SFI: Sustainable Forestry Initiative

CoC: Chain of Custody

PEFC: Pan-European Forestry Commission

CITES: Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora


Guidance



Materials




SE 0.9

SW 1.0

EoE 0.9

WM 0.9

EM 0.9

NW 0.9

NE 0.8

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.9


Guidance

Resources Mandatory Status Size Type RES2 – Locally Sourced

Materials No National SML ALL

Materials


Aim

To increase the proportion of locally sourced materials used in the construction process:

• Does the developer have a strategy in place to use locally sourced materials in the development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 10 - 20% of materials used on site are locally sourced.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 20% - 40% of materials used on site are locally sourced.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that >40% of materials used on site are locally sourced.

Please Note: this Credit relates ONLY to materials used in the public realm and NOT within the buildings developed on site.




• Where between 10% and 20% (by area – m3) or greater of the total material used on site is locally sourced.

Two Credits (Good);

• Where between 20% and 40% (by area – m3) of material of the total material used on site is locally sourced.


Guidance



Materials



• Where greater than 40% (by area – m3) of material of the total material used on site is locally sourced.

Compliance Notes

Definition of locally sourced

Locally sourced materials are defined as those that have been obtained (NOT simply procured) either:

• within a 50 mile radius of the site.

• on site.

• Manufactured within a 50 mile radius of the site.

Modern Methods of Construction (MMC)

Where the development will incorporate MMC into final building designs these features must be sourced within the stated distance, i.e. their place of manufacture and NOT the source of their component parts.

Re-used materials This credit can be awarded automatically when no new material is being used on the development (possibly for refurbishment projects).

Volume of material To demonstrate compliance with this credit the developer must provide evidence (by way of volume calculations) that the development will use the stated levels of local content.


Guidance



Materials




First Credit

Req. 1 • A copy of the specification clauses or letter from the design team / client confirming:

• The percentage of locally sourced materials to be used in the development.

OR

• Letter from the client committing to using locally sourced materials AND a map indicating the source of these materials.


AND

Relevant section from specification confirming:

• The percentage of locally sourced materials to be used in the development.

Second Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit but with a commitment to meet the 20% - 40% target.

As for first credit but demonstrating performance against the 20% - 40% target.

Third Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit but with a commitment to meet the >40% target.

As for first credit but demonstrating performance against the >40% target.

Please Note: as this is a tradeable credit developers can choose to specify it. Where local authorities require this credit they MUST be mindful of European Union Public Procurement Rules.


Guidance



Materials


Guidance Notes

Locally Sourced: locally sourced is defined as products and / or materials that come from a local source i.e. either manufactured / processed within 50 miles of the development site. It DOES NOT refer to products simply procured from a local merchant.


The transport of construction materials accounts for 5% of the UK’s total emissions. (EST) To create more sustainable communities the distance travelled to obtain the materials must be taken into account as well as the environmental impact of the manufacture and performance of the material once in situ. By availing of locally available materials developments can not only improve the carbon footprint of the country, but can also move towards a more sustainable economic community, as another advantage of using locally sourced materials is the benefits to local business growth.

Glossary of Terms

None


Guidance



Materials




SE 0.9

SW N/A

EoE 0.9

WM 0.9

EM 0.9

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.8

Y&H 0.9


Guidance

Resources Mandatory Status Size Regions

RES3 – Road Construction No National SML ALL

Materials


Aim

To increase the proportion of locally reclaimed materials used in the construction of roads, pavement, public spaces and car parks:

• What proportion of road construction materials is locally reclaimed or recycled material?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that >15% of road construction materials are locally reclaimed or recycled material.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 25-30% of road construction materials are locally reclaimed or recycled material.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that >30% of road construction materials are locally reclaimed or recycled material.




• Where greater than 15% (by mass) or greater of the road construction material is locally reclaimed or recycled material.

Two Credits (Good);

• Where 25% - 30% (by mass) of the road construction material is locally reclaimed or recycled material.


Guidance



Materials



• Where greater than 30% (by mass) of the road construction material is locally reclaimed or recycled material.

Compliance Notes

Definition of locally sourced

Please refer to RES 2.

Re-used materials Please refer to RES 2.

Mass For the purposes of this credit compliance MUST be demonstrated through the volume of recycled content and NOT by weight.


Guidance



Materials




First Credit

Req. 1 • A copy of the specification clauses or letter from the design team / client confirming 15% (by mass) of road construction materials used in the development will be locally reclaimed or recycled.

Relevant section from specification confirming:

• 15% (by mass) of road construction materials used in the development will be locally reclaimed or recycled.

OR

• Confirmation from a QS report that material to be included in roads comes from recycled / local sources.

Second Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit but with a commitment to meet the 25% - 30% target.

As for first credit but demonstrating performance against the 25% - 30% target.

Third Credit

Req. 1

As for first credit but with a commitment to meet the >30% target.

As for first credit but demonstrating performance against the >30% target.

Guidance Notes

Please refer to best practice guidance on incorporating recycled content in roads: http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/recycled_roads.html

http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/recycled_roads.html


Guidance



Materials



None


Guidance



Materials




SE 0.9

SW 1.0

EoE 0.8

WM 0.9

EM 0.9

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.8


Guidance


RES4 – Resource Efficiency No National SML All

Waste Operation


Aim

To promote resource efficiency both during construction and through the life cycle of the development:

• Has the developer made a commitment to the principles of resource efficiency during the construction phase and the minimisation of waste through operation of the development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) The developer(s) are committed to demonstrating that they have followed WRAPs principles for designing out waste, applied at the development scale.

2 (Good)

The First Credit has been achieved.

PLUS

A Local Authority OR Third Party waste recycling, green / kitchen waste collection system will be provided.

3 (Best)

The Second Credit has been achieved.

PLUS

The development provides a central waste sorting facility that segregates waste prior to removal from the development / site.

Please Note: where a third party / local authority collection scheme removes waste from site and claims to segregate waste at a separate facility three credits can be awarded. The developer must provide evidence of recycling percentages and these must be reflected in contractual agreements for the waste management strategy.


Guidance



Waste Operation





1. The developer has provided a written commitment to imbed resource efficiency within the overall scheme design with specific reference to the application of WRAP’s Designing out Waste principles at both the building level and for ALL Civil Engineering projects on site.

2. Landscape designs make reference to resource efficiency and retention of materials / waste on site.

3. Where design work has already started at the building level reference must be made in design briefs to the aims of resource efficiency. Where plot / building level developer agreements are not yet in place this must be a requirement of the development project.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The Minimum Credit has been met.

2. The developer has demonstrated that a Local Authority OR Third Party waste collection scheme will be in place and operational prior to the occupation of 10% of the residential units on site.

3. In addition that the development will achieve the relevant waste credit criteria of the building level assessment(s).


1. The second credit has been achieved.

AND

2. The development incorporates a central waste sorting facility

OR

3. Waste is segregated prior to removal from site.

OR


Guidance



Waste Operation


4. The developer can demonstrate that ALL waste removed from site is segregated off site prior to being sent to landfill with clear percentage guarantees on the volume of waste diverted to landfill.

5. This must be above 95% to demonstrate compliance with this Credit.

6. The potential for composting is included as a way in reducing waste removed from site.


Guidance



Waste Operation


Compliance Notes

Size and type of composting containers

No requirements are set on the type of external vessel or storage capacity required as this will be determined by the end user and predicted volumes of organic compostable waste. The assessor should be satisfied that, within reason, the installation is adequate for the size of development, bearing in mind the likely quantity of organic waste that will be produced by the development.

Site-wide compliance

All buildings on the development with managed or unmanaged green space within their curtilage must be provided with individual composting facilities for the first credit to be achieved.

Communal / community composting systems must serve the needs of flats or buildings which do not have an external area to install a composting bin but do include food preparation areas (including domestic and commercial kitchens).

Internal storage

All buildings served by either individual, communal / community or automated composting facilities must provide space for an internal storage container. This must be a dedicated position large enough to accommodate at least a 7 litre bin.

The frequency of disposal / collection is one of the major factors that affect the determination of space required for internal storage.

Note: It is only necessary to allow space for these containers not the containers themselves. However this does not apply to the external storage where containers must be provided for credits to be awarded

Individual composting facilities

Individual composting facilities must consist of an external composting container, specifically designed for composting and sited according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Such containers should not be sited in close proximity to windows, doors or ventilation intakes for habitable areas within buildings.


Guidance



Waste Operation


All facilities must:

a) Be in a dedicated position

b) Be accessible to disabled people

c) Have an information leaflet that is delivered to each dwelling.

Access to individual storage facilities

Individual composting facilities must be accessible to range of building users regardless of mobility or age. Guidance given by section 4 and 5 of DD266:2007 for dwelling and sections 5 and 6 of BS8300:2009 for buildings other than dwelling must be applied along the entire pathway leading to external vessel.

In a building containing multiple dwellings (e.g. flats), the accessibility requirements apply from the communal ground-floor entrance door of the building to the external vessel.

In a house OR flat OR other buildings other than dwellings with a direct entrance access from ground floor level, the accessibility requirements apply from the most appropriate entrance door of the flat / house / building to the external vessel.

Local Authority kitchen waste collection scheme

A kitchen waste collection scheme run by the Local Authority is an acceptable alternative for communal / community composting facilities.

Many Local Authorities now offer kitchen waste collection schemes in addition to garden waste collection schemes.

Where the collection scheme collects from only some of the buildings, credits cannot be awarded.

Where a building is serviced by a kitchen waste collection service, has a garden of its own and no individual composting facilities in the garden, credits cannot be awarded.

Local Authority / Third Party Waste Collection scheme

Refers to a third party waste collection service, run either by the Local Authority or a private contractor, with agreement in place to collect waste during the occupation of the development.


Guidance



Waste Operation


Automated collection systems

Automated waste collection systems can be used to score credit under the Best practise level (3 Credits) of this Issue where it can be demonstrated that waste is segregated prior to removal from site and that recycling targets are set for this waste.

Storage facilities All facilities must be in a dedicated position, be accessible to disabled people and have an information leaflet that is delivered to each building. The requirements are:

• for individual composting: space for a kitchen waste container in the home and provision of an exterior composter

• community / communal composting: space for an internal container and easy and close access to a local scheme, i.e. householder/building user will normally have to deliver the waste

• green / kitchen waste collection scheme: space for container in home, with a local green / kitchen waste collection scheme in operation.

In all cases the composting solution / scheme must achieve full compliance with the Animal by-products Regulations (2005). If applicable, the composting solution / scheme must be registered with the Environment Agency, in England and Wales, to either have a waste management licence, an environmental permit or an exemption from them.

WRAP Principles of Designing Out Waste

The five Designing out Waste principles, developed by WRAP, focus on the early engagement of the design team with the principles of resource efficiency and designing out waste at the building level. This credit relates to the development scale and applying these principles at the development scale. For further information please refer to: www.wrap.org.uk/downloads/19279-02_Design_Guide_online_pdf_version.e78c5b84.7167.pdf In addition developers should refer to WRAP Guidance on Designing Out Waste for Civil Engineering: www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/designing_out_waste/dowtce.html. These Guidance Documents should be used to manage resource efficiency on site and reduce

http://www.wrap.org.uk/downloads/19279

http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/designing


Guidance



Waste Operation


waste as a result of the development.


Guidance



Waste Operation




First Credit

Req. 1 A copy of the specification clauses or signed letter from the design team / client confirming:

• Commitment to designing out waste in the construction of buildings on site

• Waste minimisation strategy and details of how resources will be shared across the development site.

• Commitment to utilise the waste hierarchy developed by WRAP in relation to the design of buildings AND wider landscape / infrastructure.

Marked-up proposed site plan, highlighting the location of buildings with materials specifications and how these will be minimised through the construction process.

AND

Detailed design specification / written commitment to reducing waste on the development site following the WRAP principles and guidance on reducing waste.

Where material is proposed to be retained on site initial waste audits that indicate the volume(s) and how waste will be integrated / retained.

Second Credit

Req. 1

A copy of the communication from the local authority confirming:

• A local authority / automated kitchen waste collection scheme cam service all buildings with food preparation areas but without attributed green space within the development.

OR



AND

A letter or other confirmation from the Local Authority on the establishment of a kitchen waste collection service serving buildings on the development. This should describe the frequency and scope collection scheme. In the case of an automated collection system, the Local Authority should confirm the specifications associated with the system: location of inlets, level of separation and extent of the coverage.


Guidance



Waste Operation


• Communal / community composting facilities will be provided for all buildings with food preparation areas but without attributed green space within the development.

OR

Marked-up proposed site plan, highlighting the location of the communal / community composting facilities.

AND

Details of the communal / community

composting scheme indicating:

• distance from the development

• management arrangements

• access, location and size of storage prior to taking the mentioned scheme

• details of, the mentioned scheme including opening times and access.

Third Credit

Req. 1 The developer has made a commitment to provide a central waste sorting facility.

Details of the location of the waste sorting facility and a completed waste audit clearly demonstrating that this facility can accommodate waste generated on site between collections.

Req. 2 • If a third party system is being used then they must provide details of recycling rates

• In addition these must be reflected in contractual arrangements for the length of the contract for waste collection / recycling for the site.

As for second credit.

Req. 3 A copy of the specification clauses A copy of the specification clauses or


Guidance



Waste Operation


or letter from the design team / client confirming:

• a central waste segregation store will be available to ALL the buildings on site.

• A commitment is made to waste segregation prior to removal from site.

letter from the design team / client confirming:

• a central waste segregation store will be available to ALL the buildings on site.

• A commitment is made to waste segregation prior to removal from site.

Guidance Notes

• Where the developer is intending to remove large volumes of topsoil from site this should be retained as much as possible

• Where soil is being removed from site as part of the remediation strategy this can be excluded from this credit where it can be demonstrated that compliance with PS1 One Credit has been achieved.


Please refer to the WRAP Guidance on Designing out Waste: http://www.wrap.org.uk/downloads/19279-02_Design_Guide_online_pdf_version.e78c5b84.7167.pdf and www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/designing_out_waste/dowtce.html

Glossary of Terms

Automated collection systems: Some companies now offer a fully automated underground system, for the collection, sorting and transport of waste. It allows for waste separation at the source, for different types of waste and from multiple locations, with enhanced hygienic, occupational health and safety standards. It also reduces the use of waste transport by lorries, reducing nuisance and CO2 emissions.

Designing Out Waste Guidance: www.wrap.org.uk/downloads/19279-02_Design_Guide_online_pdf_version.e78c5b84.7167.pdf


http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/designing_out_waste/dowtce.htm



Guidance



Waste Operation


Designing Out Waste for Civil Engineering: www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/designing_out_waste/dowtce.html

Composting: Composting is a natural process which converts organic waste into an earth-like mass by means of bacteria and micro-organisms. The composting process is also supported by larvae, wood lice, beetles, worms and other such creatures.

http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/designing_out_waste/dowtce.htm


Guidance



Waste Operation




SE 0.7

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM N/A

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.8

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


RES5 – Groundwater No National SML ALL

Water Resources


Aim

To ensure that the development does not adversely impact upon local public or private water supply through polluting aquifers or groundwater:

• Are pollution prevention measures being installed to ensure that water quality at nearby surface water and groundwater sources is not adversely affected during construction or occupation of the development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) General water pollution prevention measures are in place to avoid any adverse affects to local abstractions both during the construction phase and through the life cycle of the development.

2 (Good) Compliance with the guidance laid down in relevant Environment Agency Pollution Prevention Guidelines for the proposed activity on site (See Compliance Notes).

3 (Best) Water interception and cleaning facilities in place during construction and in water run off management system to ensure that clean water is returned to ground.


The following demonstrates compliance:


1. A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the development site users.

2. Where an aquifer exists measures are put in place to avoid any potential pollution during construction.


Guidance



Water Resources


Two Credits (Good);

1. All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and detailed in accordance with the recommendations of Pollution Prevention Guidelines and where applicable the CIRIA SUDS manual.


1. Specification of SUDS or source control systems such as permeable surfaces or infiltration trenches where run-off drains are in areas with a relatively low risk source of watercourse pollution (groundwater).

2. Specification of oil / petrol separators (or equivalent system) in surface water drainage systems, where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil.


Guidance



Water Resources


Compliance Notes

Areas that are a source of pollution

For the purpose of this credit an area that presents a risk of watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.

Areas where oil separators are required

The following site areas (where present) require oil separators in surface water drainage systems:

• Car parks larger than 800m2 or with 50 or more parking spaces.

• Smaller car parks discharging to a sensitive environment.

• Areas where goods vehicles are parked or manoeuvred.

• Vehicle maintenance areas.

• Roads.

• Industrial sites where oil is stored or used.

• Refuelling facilities.

SUDS and oil interception

In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be required if appropriately designed Sustainable Urban Drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3 for additional guidance.

Infill building on existing site

Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill development, the requirements apply to areas within the construction zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the construction zone that are affected by the new works i.e. drainage onto or from the proposed development.

Suitable level of treatment

In all cases the assessor should determine the operational use of the site in order to determine if the proposed surface water run-off strategy is suitable.


Guidance



Water Resources


Rainwater run-off

This credit is not intended to cover the treatment of rainwater run-off except where there is a risk of significant pollution arising.

Underground / covered areas

Where it can be demonstrated that there will be no drainage or wash down facilities that may lead water from inside the underground or covered area to natural watercourses, then such areas comply with the requirements by default.

Roof plant Roof top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under this credit.

No areas at risk from pollution

Where it can be demonstrated that there are no external areas that present a pollution risk, e.g. parking, delivery, manoeuvring or servicing facilities (including individual parking spaces), external waste storage space or other hard standing areas AND there is no plant supported on the roof, then the first (one) credit can be awarded by default.

Permeable paving system

Where it can be demonstrated that a permeable paving system designed to retain silts and degrade oils has been used, then this will meet the requirements of this credit for car parks and access roads.

Drainage plan A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site, which accurately identifies all drains, must be produced and handed over to the new occupier. If there is no in-house expertise to do this, a reputable drainage company should be used.

Where there are no watercourses close to the site

Where there are no public or private surface or groundwater abstractions on or close to the site Credits can be awarded if the developer can demonstrate that they have reduced the risk of contamination and surface water run-off from site.


Guidance



Water Resources




First Credit

Req. 1 Marked-up proposed site plan highlighting low and high risk areas of the site.

AND

A copy of the specification or design plan confirming type of pollution control systems specified.

Marked-up proposed site plan highlighting low and high risk areas of the site.

AND

A copy of the specification or design plan confirming type of pollution control systems specified.


• A drainage plan will be produced and handed over to the development authority and occupiers.

A copy of the drainage plan that has been produced and handed over to the development authority and occupiers.

Req. 3 Where areas are at risk of contamination through the construction phase of the development mitigation measures have been identified and the developer has committed to implement these during the construction of the development.

Evidence, in the form of a letter or consultation with a relevant statutory body, demonstrates that where areas are at risk of contamination through the construction phase of the development the developer has made written commitments to the mitigation of these risks and that measures have been identified that the developer has committed to during the construction of the development.

Second Credit



Guidance



Water Resources


Req. 2 As for first credit but with a copy of the specification clauses or letter from the design team / client confirming:

1. All water pollution prevention systems are designed in accordance with PPG3 and the SUDS manual (where appropriate).

2. Outlining indicative examples of compliance with PPG3 and the SUDS manual.


AND

A copy of the drainage plan that has been produced and handed over to the development authority and occupiers.

Third Credit



• Specification of SUDS or source control systems such as permeable surfaces or infiltration trenches where run-off drains are in areas with a relatively low risk source of watercourse pollution (groundwater).

A copy of the specification or design plan confirming:

• Specification of SUDS or source control systems such as permeable surfaces or infiltration trenches where run-off drains are in areas with a relatively low risk source of watercourse pollution (groundwater).


• Specification of oil / petrol separators (or equivalent system) in surface water drainage systems, where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil.

A copy of the specification or design plan confirming:

• Specification of oil / petrol separators (or equivalent system) in surface water drainage systems, where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil.


Guidance



Water Resources


Guidance Notes

Types of Oil Separator

• Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those arising from car park run-off.

• Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They are suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies and/or for trapping large spillages.

Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘by pass’ separators:

• Full retention separators treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally equivalent to the flow generated by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr.

• Bypass separators fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above this rate are allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full treatment for high flows.


Drainage: Most existing sites will have two types of drain. Surface water drains, including land drains and most road drains, should carry only uncontaminated rainwater, as they will lead to a local river, stream or soakaways. The foul water drain is designed to carry contaminated waste water safely to a storage lagoon, treatment system or sewage works for treatment. In the case of an isolated house, or a small community biological treatment plant, care should be taken not to overload this by disposing of disinfectant or grease down the foul drain (see PPG4).

Prior agreement from the local sewerage undertaker is required before you connect to the public foul water system. Where significant work is being undertaken on an existing site or a new development, the Agencies encourage the consideration of an alternative approach for surface drainage, which uses a combination of techniques known collectively as Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS). This approach has significant environmental benefits and may also have lower installation costs. See Reference 6 for further details.

Surface water treatment: Surface water can be contaminated with silt, heavy metals, chemicals and oil, which can be damaging in watercourses and groundwater.


Guidance



Water Resources


In many cases, it will require treatment by controlling the pollution at its source or just before the discharge point. SuDS may provide a suitable solution (see Reference 6). In areas where there is a high risk of oil pollution, it may be necessary to install an oil separator to protect the surface water system and reduce the risk of pollution. See separate guidelines for details (PPG3).

Glossary of Terms

Appropriate statutory body: This refers to either the Environment Agency in England & Wales, the Environment and Heritage Service (EHS) in Northern Ireland or the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland (or any other body deemed relevant by the Local Authority).

Low risk areas: Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas.

Soakaways: A sub-surface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water in to the ground. As a general point, soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point source soakaways should be avoided for road and car-park drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators.


Guidance



Water Resources




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 0.8

NE 1.0

LON 1.0

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


RES6 - Land - Remediation No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Pollution


Aim

To promote the re-use of contaminated land in an appropriate and sustainable manner:

• How has the site been remediated?

A: Prevent generation of waste arising from site.

B: In-situ remediation treatment (excluding capping systems).

C: Ex-situ treatment at the site of generation OR off site treatment facility and return for re-use where feasible.

D: On site containment or capping.

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) C or D.

2 (Good) B

3 (Best) A

Please Note: this Credit can only be applied where Three Credits have been awarded in PS1.




• Where contaminated land that requires remediation has undergone:


OR



Guidance



Pollution


Two Credits (Good);

1. Where contaminated land that requires remediation has undergone:



1. Where contaminated land that requires remediation has undergone:


Compliance Notes

Contaminated Land

Chemical contaminants that exist in soil that pose a threat to human or natural life.

Land Remediation Developers should seek the most appropriate solution to land remediation. Guidance should be sought from the relevant national body, including Defra Guidance on Land Remediation: http://randd.defra.gov.uk/Document.aspx?Document=SP1001_9957_FRP.pdf

http://randd.defra.gov.uk/Document.aspx?Document=SP1001_9957


Guidance



Pollution




First Credit

Req. 1

• Written confirmation from a land contamination specialist that the site is contaminated and in need of remediation.

• Written confirmation from a land contamination specialist that the site is contaminated and in need of remediation.

Req. 2

• Initial report from a land remediation consultant / specialist confirming that for the assessed site the preferred method of remediation is / will be:


OR


• As for Outline Planning Stage

OR

• Evidence that land remediation is being undertaken by method C or D.

Second Credit

Req. 1

• Initial report from a land remediation consultant / specialist confirming that for the assessed site the preferred method of remediation is / will be:



OR

• Evidence that land remediation is being undertaken by method B.

Third Credit

Req. 1

• Initial report from a land remediation consultant / specialist confirming



Guidance



Pollution


that for the assessed site the preferred method of remediation is / will be:


OR

• Evidence that land remediation is being undertaken by method A.


Remediation should be carried out under the guidance of suitably qualified remediation experts.


Guidance



Pollution




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Place Shaping


Guidance

Place Shaping Mandatory Status Size Type

PS1 – Sequential Approach No National SML ALL

Effective Use of Land


Aim

To ensure the most effective and efficient use of land, applying a sequential approach to ensure appropriate development:

• How can the site be best characterised?

a) Contaminated land - remediated or awaiting remediation.

b) Brownfield - derelict urban land OR existing developed land.

c) Previously undeveloped - includes residential garden(s).

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) C: Previously undeveloped - includes residential garden(s).

2 (Good) B: Brownfield - derelict urban land OR existing developed land (previously developed land).

3 (Best) A: Contaminated land - remediated or awaiting remediation.

Please Note: Greenfield sites do not qualify for credits under PS1. However, ONE Credit can be awarded where the land is designated as strategic land in a local plan or has been identified as suitable for development by a Local Authority.

Assessors should classify the land type at their discretion. Where a site is a mix of Greenfield / Brownfield and / or contaminated land the highest percentage area (by land area) should be used to award credits.




• Where the development site has previously not been developed AND is designated as land suitable for development by the Local Authority.


Guidance





• Evidence demonstrates that the size and tenure needs of the current and future community (including the demographic requirements) have been investigated and addressed.

• A demonstrated need for the development of the proposed site has been identified and documented accordingly.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The First Credit has been achieved.

2. The development site is classified as Brownfield - derelict urban land OR existing developed land (previously developed land).

3. Where an investigation carried out as part of the first credit has also identified the proposed development site as a previously undeveloped parcel of land.



2. Where an investigation carried out as part of the first credit has also identified the proposed development site as Contaminated land - remediated or awaiting remediation.


Guidance





Compliance Notes

The credit can be awarded where compliance with the following requirements is demonstrated:

1. Previously undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary offices / parking, material / machinery storage) must be considered as development on undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations. If the undeveloped land is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’, this area can be excluded from the calculations as there is no long term impact.

1. Where a site has been previously developed more than 50 years ago, the credit may be awarded if the site is deemed to be “contaminated”.

2. BREEAM adopts the Communities and Local Government (CLG) definition of previously developed land, as stated in Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing, i.e. land which is, or was occupied by a permanent structure (excluding agricultural or forestry buildings), and associated fixed surface infrastructure (i.e. urban land uses such as transport, utilities, residential, industry and commerce and community services). In certain cases some agricultural buildings will be considered to be previously developed land, e.g. barn conversions, this should be agreed with BRE prior to awarding the credit.

3. The definition includes;

1. Permanent defence buildings, hard landscaping and infrastructure

2. Land used for mineral extraction and waste disposal, where provision for restoration has not been made through development control procedures (this relates to minerals and waste sites which remain un-restored after use because there were no planning conditions insisting upon restoration). All other such sites will be restored to 'Greenfield' status, by virtue of the planning condition.

4. The definition excludes;

1. Land and buildings that are currently in use for agricultural or forestry purposes.

2. Land in built-up areas which has not been developed previously (e.g. parks, recreation grounds, and allotments, even though these areas may contain certain urban features such as paths, pavilions and other buildings).

3. Land that was previously developed but where the remains of any structure (or activity) have blended into the landscape over time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part of the natural surroundings).

4. Land where there is a clear reason that could outweigh the re-use of the site, such as its contribution to nature conservation, or it has subsequently been put to an amenity use and cannot be regarded as requiring redevelopment, e.g. flooded gravel pits.


Guidance





5. Where the site is a Greenfield site the developer MUST provide details of the lands status by way of marked up plans of the site in relation to Local Authority classification.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1 • A professional site wide investigation report that determines the ‘classification’ of the land use as stated within the credit criteria completed by a qualified expert.

• The overall site wide plan including the footprint areas (m2) of all buildings, hard landscaping, access roads and parking areas.

• Confirmation that the development site is classified as strategic by the local planning authority.

Req. 2

• Details of previous land use, e.g. maps, reports and site photographs.

Second Credit



Req. 2


Third Credit




Guidance





Req. 2


Req. 3 Where the credit has been awarded for the reuse of ‘contaminated land’ then the documentation provided must clearly demonstrate that the following requirements have been met:

• If the design team or client confirms the site is contaminated, a copy of a professional report must be provided to the assessor.

• The report must identify the degree of contamination and make recommendations for the treatment, containment or removal in line with the Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA) procedure, published by DEFRA and the Environment Agency.

Where the credit has been awarded for the reuse of ‘contaminated land’ then the documentation provided must clearly demonstrate that the following requirements have been met:

• The contractor responsible for remediation of the site must confirm that the report recommendations and CLEA requirements have been, or will be, implemented in full.

• If a contractor has not yet been appointed, the specification must state that the contractor responsible for the site remediation is also responsible for demonstrating compliance with the contaminated land report recommendations and CLEA requirements. Either the project team, or contractor, must confirm this before this credit is awarded.

• There has been no development on the site between the contamination remediation work and the construction of the assessed development i.e. the remediation has been carried out for the assessed development and no other previous project.


Guidance






Land Classification: the land class / type must be classified by a suitably qualified professional, or designated as being of this type by the Local Authority.


Guidance







SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 1.0

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


PS2 – Land Reuse No Regional SML ALL



Aim

To ensure the most effective and efficient use of land:

• How much of the development site will be previously developed or Brownfield land which will be brought back into use by this development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) 50%+ of the development site built on previously developed / Brownfield land will be brought back into use.

2 (Good) 75%+ of the development site built on previously developed / Brownfield land will be brought back into use.

3 (Best) 100% of the development site built on previously developed / Brownfield land will be brought back into use.




• The developer can demonstrate that 50-75% of the development site that was built on previously developed / Brownfield land will be brought back into use by this development.

Two Credits (Good);

• The developer can demonstrate that more than 75% of the development site that was built on previously developed / Brownfield land will be brought back into use by this development.


Guidance






• The developer can demonstrate that 100% of the development site that was built on previously developed / Brownfield land will be brought back into use by this development.

Compliance Notes

Percentage of land

The developer must demonstrate that the site area has been calculated and that the required percentages have been met. Where existing structures were in place the floor area these occupied can be included in the assessment.


Guidance







All Credits

Req. 1 • Details of previous land use, e.g. maps, reports and site photographs.

Details of previous land use, e.g. maps, reports and site photographs.


Req. 2 • A letter from the developer or project team to the Local Authority with a commitment to the percentage of the development site built on previously developed / Brownfield land that will be brought back into use.

• Confirmation from the developer or project team the percentage of the development site built on previously developed / Brownfield land that will be brought back into use.


Guidance







SE 0.8

SW 0.8

EoE 1.0

WM N/A

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 0.9

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


PS3 – Building Reuse No National SML ALL



Aim

To ensure effective re-use of appropriate buildings:

• What percentage of the existing buildings on site will be re-used / refurbished?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) 25% of existing buildings will be reused or refurbished.

2 (Good) 25 - 50 of existing buildings will be reused or refurbished.

3 (Best) 50+% of existing buildings will be reused or refurbished.




• The developer can demonstrate that 25% of existing buildings will be reused or refurbished.

Two Credits (Good);

• The developer can demonstrate that 25 - 50% of existing buildings will be reused or refurbished.


• The developer can demonstrate that more than 50% of existing buildings will be reused or refurbished.


Guidance





Compliance Notes

Existing Building An existing building is classified as any structure that remains on site that can be retained on site.

Building Refurbishment

Please refer to BLD3 for the requirements of how to refurbish a building.


Guidance







All Credits

Req. 1 • A letter from the developer or project team to the Local Authority with a commitment to the percentage of existing buildings that will be reused or refurbished.

• Site wide plan of existing buildings and buildings that will be reused or refurbished along with calculations.


Guidance







SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 0.7

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


PS4 – Landscaping No National SML ALL

Design Process


Aim

To ensure that the character of the landscape is respected and, where possible, enhanced through the location of features and design appropriate to the local environment.

• Will a landscaping scheme be drawn up, in consultation with the Local Authority, for the site to provide an integrated and ecologically sensitive green infrastructure with landscape and ecological assets preserved and appropriately augmented?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Appropriate mix of hard and soft landscaping with existing native species or features preserved in consultation with the Local Authority.

2 (Good)

Drawn up with a qualified landscape architect OR a qualified ecologist

AND

Where the Local Authority, landscape architect OR ecologist have identified site features that are considered of value then these are protected throughout the development of the site.

3 (Best)

Drawn up with a qualified landscape architect AND a qualified ecologist.

AND

Features designated as of value by the Local Authority, landscape architect OR ecologist are both protected and enhanced either physically or through public access / interpretation within the development.




• A landscape design statement has been developed in consultation with Local Authority to determine the specific native specie’s requirements for the proposed development.


Guidance



Design Process


Two Credits (Good);

• A landscape design statement has been developed to determine the specific native specie’s requirements for the proposed development in consultation with Local Authority and one of the following experts:

a) Qualified Landscape Architect

Or

b) Qualified Ecologist

• Where features are designated as ‘of value’.

Three Credits;

• A landscape design statement has been developed to determine the specific native species requirements for the proposed development in consultation with the Local Authority and the following experts:

a) Qualified Landscape Architect

And

b) Qualified Ecologist


Guidance



Design Process


Compliance Notes

Qualified landscape Architect

A Qualified Landscape Architect has the following qualifications:

a) Holds a degree which is accredited by the Landscape Institute.

Qualified Ecologist A Qualified Ecologist meets the following requirements:

a) Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject.

b) Is a practising ecologist, with a minimum of 3 years relevant experience (within the last 5 years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and the built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant experience are; ecological impact assessments; Phase 1 and 2 habitat surveys and habitat restoration.

c) Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.

Appropriate hard landscaping

This can incorporate, but is not exclusive too:

• Planting schemes

• Soft verges

• Hard features

• Fountains

• Public art etc.


Guidance



Design Process


Features of value Where the Local Authority, Landscape Architect OR Ecologist designate an element of the site ‘as value’ then these should be protected and potentially incorporated within the design of the development. This can include, but is not exclusive of:

• Areas of ecological value;

• Ponds / waterways;

• Existing structures (historical buildings / walls etc);

• Hedges;

• Trees covered by a Tree Preservation Order;

Consultation with the Local Authority ( correct body / stakeholder)

To demonstrate compliance with the requirement to consult with the correct body any feature that is classed as important should be referred to the Local Authorities Conservation Officer or relevant Statutory Body.

The relevant stakeholder must provide information relating to the specific feature in order to demonstrate compliance with the BREEAM requirements. This information must be fully referenced in the assessor’s report.

Existing native species or features

Existing native species refers to any areas or features designated by a suitably qualified ecologist of such value that they should be preserved or enhanced within the new development.

Existing features refers to existing features that the local authority OR landscape architect feel should be preserved as a result of the development.


Guidance



Design Process




First Credit

Req. 1 Copy of the proposed landscape design statement with details on the specific native species required for the proposed development site.

Copy of the landscape design statement with input from the Local Authority as to the specific native species required for the development site.

• Written confirmation that the development has addressed the Local Authority’s requirements in regards to native flora species for the development site.

• Written confirmation that features considered important will be preserved in the new development.

Req. 2

• A letter from the developer or project team to the Local Authority with a commitment to plant native flora species within the development.

• A letter from the design team committed to preserving existing landscape features through the new development.

Second Credit

Req. 1 • First Credit has been achieved.

Copy of the landscape design statement with input from:

• Local Authority as to the specific native species required for the development site.

Either:

1. Qualified landscape architect.

Or

2. Qualified Ecologist.

Req. 2

A letter from the developer or project team appointing one of the following:


Or



Guidance



Design Process


Req. 3 Where any feature has been identified as of value:

• Details of the feature and marked up copies of the masterplan and where these features are MUST be provided

Where any feature has been identified as of value:


AND

• Details of how this feature will be protected through the development of the project MUST be provided

• AND

• Evidence of consultation with the relevant professional (Local Authority / Landscape Architect / Ecologist) must be provided.

Third Credit

Req. 1 • First Credit has been achieved.

Copy of the landscape design statement with input from:

• Local Authority as to the specific native species required for the development site.

Both:


And


Req. 2

Letters from the developer or project team appointing both of the following:


And


Req. 3 Where any feature has been identified as of value:


Where any feature has been identified as of value:


AND


Guidance



Design Process


• Evidence that the feature has been incorporated within the final design / masterplan

• Details of how this feature will be protected through the development of the project MUST be provided

• AND

Evidence of consultation with the relevant professional (Local Authority / Landscape Architect / Ecologist) must be provided.

Please Note: where a feature has been designated as being ‘of value’ the assessor must use their professional judgement as to how this has been incorporated into the new development.


Peer review: Is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics.

Full members of the following organisations, who meet the above requirements, are deemed suitably qualified ecologists for the purposes of BREEAM:

a) Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC)

b) Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM)

c) Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM)

d) Landscape Institute (LI)

e) Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA).


Guidance



Design Process




SE 0.7

SW N/A

EoE 0.9

WM N/A

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.8

Y&H N/A


Guidance


PS5 – Design and Access Yes National SML ALL

Design Process


Aim

To ensure that the development is accessible, aesthetically and architecturally attractive:

• Has a design and access statement, incorporating the findings of context appraisals and explaining emerging design principles been discussed with the Local Authority prior to the application?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where evidence provided demonstrates that a Design and Access Statement has been completed, that builds on context appraisal that includes:

a) Context

b) Spatial Relationships

c) Connectivity to other areas/neighbourhoods

d) Landmarks, Vistas and Focal points

e) Urban Design

f) Conservation

g) Urban Form

h) Internal Environment

2 (Good)

The first credit has been achieved.

AND That this is completed through an Enquiry by Design process (or equivalent) and has included active engagement with the local community.

3 (Best)

The second credit has been achieved.

AND

Where evidence provided demonstrates that measures have been taken to involve a CABE (Design Council) or Regional Design


Guidance



Design Process


Champion (or equivalent).

And

Reference is made to the fundamental good design principles outlined in the Urban Design Compendium (or equivalent).



One Credit (Minimum – Mandatory);

• The assessed development is accompanied with a Design and Access Statement that builds on context appraisals and addresses the following as a minimum:

a) Context


c) Connectivity to other areas/neighbourhoods

d) Landmarks, Vistas and Focal points

e) Urban Design

f) Conservation

g) Urban Form


Two Credits (Good);


2. Evidence provided demonstrates that the Design and Access Statement is a direct result of consultation and engagement with the local community.

• Documentation outlines that the consultation process undertaken and the recommendations that have been incorporated are a result of public consultation with the design team.

Note: This could be achieved through an Enquiry by Design process (or equivalent).


Guidance



Design Process



1. The First and Second Credits have been achieved.

2. Where evidence demonstrates that the development has involved and consulted with the following:

• CABE Design Champion (or equivalent from the Design Council), particularly those with an appropriate understanding of Access and inclusion.

3. Alternatives;

• Regional Design Champion

• Independent Design Champion (could be a representative from the local authority with designated design review authority)

• Registered Access Consultant

4. Evidence that demonstrates that the design team have addressed the good design principles as outlined in CABE’s Urban Design Compendium (or local design guide).


Guidance



Design Process


Compliance Notes

Compliance notes

Context The character and setting into which the development will be placed. The project must strengthen existing and future local communities, reinforcing positive change not undermining them.

Operational & Spatial Relationships

Development should harmonise or contrast with their surroundings, creating distinctions from other developments.

Connections

Connections with other buildings and spaces within the development should be considered with respect to materials, forms, landscapes, footpaths and to other existing infrastructure, providing connectivity to the area. Considerations should be given to the ease of ‘personal logistics’ (without unnecessary need for assistance), way-finding (through design, signage and tactile routes), visual clarity and acoustic clarity.

Landmarks, Vistas & Focal Points

These should reinforce character and setting of place, but should not be at the expense of good building design.

Urban Design

Should be considered outside the immediate context. Analysing strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats that should be made, as well as movement assessments, photographs, drawings and context appraisal diagrams. These need to be in context with existing urban forms.

Sustainability Measures to be taken within the development that outline sustainable features

Design Review Medium and large developments must be supplied for a design review to CABE (Design Council) and any recommendations made must be incorporated into the design.


Guidance



Design Process


Form

Form, should reflect strong townscape function and values, avoiding the insipid and ordinary. If buildings within the development are significant additions or have distinctive functions, this should be represented through their architecture. The architecture of the buildings within the development should raise interest and character of the locale, by providing attractive, engaging and enhancing appearance. Colours and textures may harmonise or contrast to suite context and building function. Richness and variety of types will add to the developments interest.

Conservation All materials should be in context with local culture. Photographs and drawings can be used to illustrate historic/ listed buildings and conservation areas.

Internal Environment

Design considerations should include the perspective of disabled people with mobility, stamina, dexterity, visual, hearing and / or cognitive impairments.


Guidance



Design Process




First Credit

Req. 1 A letter of appointment for an appropriate qualified consultant(s):

• This could include architects, planners, engineers, ecologist, etc.

Req. 2 An outline of the proposed Design and Access Statement that confirms the development will address the minimum criteria outlined below:

a) Context


c) Connectivity (Neighbourhood)

d) Landmarks, Vistas, Focal Points

e) Urban Design

f) Conservation

g) Urban Form


A copy of the final Design and Access Statement that confirms the development has addressed the minimum criteria outlined below:

a) Context


c) Connectivity (Neighbourhood)

d) Landmarks, Vistas, Focal Points

e) Urban Design

f) Conservation

g) Urban Form


Second Credit

Req. 1 The First Credit has been achieved. The First Credit has been achieved.

Req. 2 Copy of the minutes from the local community consultation workshop which include the following:

• List of the attendees – should include: key stakeholder and local community representatives (such

Copy of minutes from the follow up meeting addressing the original concerns and recommendation raised by the local community should include the following.

• List of attendees – where possible


Guidance



Design Process


as local council elected members)

• outline of the agenda for the initial consultation process meeting (workshop)

• an outline of the recommendations and concerns of the attendees.

it should include representatives from the first consultation meeting.

• Outline of agenda for the follow-up consultation process meeting.

• An outline of response(s) or action(s) to items that were initially raised at last community meeting.

Req. 3 Commitment from the developer to ensure that the consultation process addresses the key principles outlined by the Enquiry by Design process (or its equivalent).

Documentation confirming that the final Design and Access Statement underwent an Enquiry by Design process (or equivalent).

• Information within the Design and Access Statement should correlate to the issues / concerns raised by the local community and the response / actions outlined by the design team.

Third Credit

Req. 1 First and Second Credits have been achieved.

First and Second Credits have been achieved.

Req. 2 A written commitment that the design team will address the fundamental good design principles as set out in CABE’s Urban Design Compendium.

A copy of the Design and Access Statement which has been put together by the design team and has addressed the fundamental good design principles as set out in CABE’s Urban Design Compendium

• It also has in principle support from the Local Planning Authority.

Req. 3 A letter of confirmation of appointment of Design Champion stating their role, responsibilities and applicable phases, where appropriate.

Note: Letter of confirmation could be for one of the following experts:

A copy of a summary report outlining the Design Champion’s recommendations and advice (where applicable) in regards to the compilation of the final Design and Access Statement for the development.


Guidance



Design Process


• CABE Urban Design Champion

• Regional Urban Design Champion

• ‘Independent’ Design Champion

• Designated Local Authority Design Champion

• Or equivalent.

Please Note: please refer to COM2 for other consultation schemes that are compliant with ‘Enquiry by Design’.


Guidance



Design Process



Design and Access Statement: It is a requirement for all planning applications to be accompanied with a Design and Access statement. It should explain the design principles and concepts that have informed the development and how access issues have been dealt with. A design and access statement will need to cover two potential aspects of access, vehicular and transport links, and inclusive access. However design and access are not separate. The statement should show that all access issues have been considered together. (www.planningportal.gov.uk/planning/applications/howtoapply/whattosubmit/designaccess)

Design Review: A peer review of project deliverables, such as design specifications

Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment (CABE): Champions well-designed buildings and public space. CABE provide expert and practical advice to planners, designers, clients and architects, offering them guidance on their project. (Note: where CABE is replace by a Design Council, or equivalent, their standards will supercede CABEs where relevant).

Enquiry by Design: A collaborative planning approach devised and promoted by The Princes Foundation, often used for large or significant sites. A single event held over several days assesses a complex series of design requirements of a new or revived community.

The process brings key stakeholders together around the same table, where problems can be aired as they arise and every issue tested by being drawn. It can be used for the regeneration of existing communities or the planning of new developments. The enquiry by design process also has an educational component, introducing the participants to the concepts of traditional urbanism and helping to ensure that the project is not only sustainable but also relates to local characteristics.

The Enquiry by Design process approaches each brief as a new design problem, and tailors a response appropriate to the dialogue between stakeholders. The Prince’s Foundation is a leading exponent of this aspect of practice, and has successfully brought into a single forum a broad spectrum of participants, to include, critically, the local community, engaging them at the heart of the design process.

The process is often staged over five days and varies according to the size and complexity of the site. The outcome is a vision that unifies everyone involved in the development, including those who will eventually give planning permission. This intense workshop is normally preceded by one or more two-day scoping workshops, to gather technical information, conduct a thorough physical analysis of the site and its surroundings and produce a Pattern Book - a study of nearby villages, towns and neighbourhoods which identifies prevalent local spatial types which should be drawn upon for the design of the new development.

Urban Form / Design: Concerns the arrangement, appearance and functionality of towns and cities, and in particular the shaping and uses of urban public space. It has traditionally been regarded as a disciplinary subset of urban planning, landscape architecture, or architecture and in more recent times has been linked to emergent disciplines such as landscape urbanism. However, with its increasing prominence in the activities of these

http://www.planningportal.gov.uk/planning/applications/howtoapply/whattosubmit/designaccess


Guidance



Design Process


disciplines, it is better conceptualised as a design practice that operates at the intersection of all three, and requires a good understanding of a range of others besides, such as urban economics, political economy and social theory.

Sustainable Design (also referred to as "green design", "eco-design", or "design for environment"): The art of designing physical objects and the built environment to comply with the principles of economic, social, and ecological sustainability

Active Frontage: to encourage frequently used pedestrian entrances and exits onto streets.

Integrated approach: A sustainable urban development will be based on interlocking principles. These will relate to community, resources, built form, landscape, ecology and materials. Urban design can help to deliver schemes that achieve all of these in a way that does more than tick boxes. It can help create places where people want to be.

Commitment and leadership: Creating successful places requires commitment and leadership to overcome complex problems. Issues will be easier to resolve where there is clear commitment to quality and strong leadership. It is vital that someone keeps an eye on the vision to steer and inspire the team.

Legacy and management: Designing and delivering quality is only the start. Places that people will cherish for generations need looking after. This will ensure that they function in the long term and provide a good quality of life for current and future occupiers. Giving occupiers control over their environment can be an effective way of doing this. How areas will be governed and managed must influence design decisions.

Long-term involvement: Creating places requires long-term involvement to ensure that the original vision is not diluted. The urban designer and master planner should remain in post once outline consent is granted. Long-term involvement in a project will instil confidence and enable investors to generate maximum value from high-quality schemes.

Working collaboratively: Creating successful places requires input from all stakeholders. This can include skills, resources, knowledge and enthusiasm. For all stakeholders to contribute fully there needs to be understanding from the outset of a project’s objectives, how and when these will be delivered, and what resources are available. Each stakeholder needs to be clear about what they can offer.


Guidance



Design Process




SE 1.0

SW N/A

EoE 0.9

WM N/A

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 1.0

Y&H N/A


Guidance


PS6 – Green Areas No National SML ALL

Open Space


Aim

To ensure access to high quality public green space for all:

• How far will the local community have to travel to reach high quality public green space?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) 100% of dwellings within 750m of designated public green space.

2 (Good) 100% of dwellings are within 500m of designated public green space.

3 (Best)


PLUS

The Assessable Natural Green Space Standards (ANGSt) have been met


The following demonstrates compliance:

One Credit (Minimum):

• The developer can demonstrate that all dwellings within the proposed site are within 750m of designated public green space.

Two Credits (Good):

• The developer can demonstrate that all dwellings within the proposed site are within 500m of designated public green space.


Guidance



Open Space


Three Credits (Best):

• The development meets the requirements of ANGSt guidance.

Note: The 300m standard (a straight-line distance) is based upon a requirement to provide green space within five minutes walk distance. Alternatively, it is possible to calculate actual distances covered within a five minute walk taking into account real walking routes.

Please Note: in blocks of flats / multi-residential buildings the distance is calculated from the main entrance to the building.


Guidance



Open Space


Compliance Notes

Assessable Natural Green Space Standard (ANGSt)

The Assessable Natural Green Space Standards are maintained and operated by Natural England. They require:

• an accessible natural green space of at least 2 hectares in size, no more than 300 metres (5 minutes walk) from home

• at least one accessible 20 hectare site within two kilometres of home

• one accessible 100 hectare site within five kilometres of home • one accessible 500 hectare site within ten kilometres of home • one hectare of statutory Local Nature Reserves per thousand

population.

Please refer to the Natural England website for the most up to date standard: www.naturalengland.org.uk/ourwork/enjoying/places/greenspace/greenspacestandards.aspx

Dwelling A dwelling is classified as a residential unit.

Access to green space

On constrained sites the green space can be beyond the site cartilage if this space is under public ownership and access is maintained via a safe pedestrian route.

http://www.naturalengland.org.uk/ourwork/enjoying/places/greenspace/gr


Guidance



Open Space




First Credit

Req. 1 Map of the development site providing details of dwelling locations and proposed public green space.

• Letter of commitment to incorporating publicly available green spaces within 750m of each dwelling on site.

Map of the development site providing details of dwelling locations and proposed public green space.

• Demonstration that each dwelling on site is within 750m of an area of designated public green space.

Second Credit

Req. 1 Map of the development site providing details of dwelling locations and proposed public green space. • Letter of commitment to

incorporating publicly available green spaces within 500m of each dwelling on site.

Map of the development site providing details of dwelling locations and proposed public green space.

• Demonstration that each dwelling on site is within 500m of an area of designated public green space.

Third Credit

Req. 1 A statement of commitment from the developer to comply with the ANGSt Standards.

The investigation report (or equivalent) shows that the developer has addressed and committed to meeting the requirements under the ANGSt Standards.

Evidence demonstrates that the latest ANGSt requirements have been met in full.

Please Note: where the public green space falls beyond the boundary of the site clearly marked plans must be provided that demonstrate where the space is in relation to the development site. The distance that residents are required to travel and the route they must take should also be clearly marked. This must be via a safe pedestrian route.


Guidance



Open Space



CABE: The Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment (CABE) website contains best practice guidance and information on initiatives associated with the design of the ‘public space’ and children’s play areas (www.cabe.org.uk). Please Note that any national body that replaces CABE and publishes new guidance will take precedence.

ANGSt: Natural England is responsible for the ANGSt scheme: www.naturalengland.org.uk/ourwork/enjoying/places/greenspace/greenspacestandards.aspx

http://www.cabe.org.uk

http://www.naturalengland.org.uk/ourwork/enjoying/places/greenspace/greenspacestandards.aspx


Guidance



Open Space




SE 1.0

SW N/A

EoE 0.9

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 1.0

Y&H N/A


Guidance


PS7 – Local Demographics Yes National SML ALL

Inclusive Communities


Aim

To ensure that the development attracts a diverse community reflecting surrounding local demographic trends and priorities.

• Has a statement been prepared explaining how the development contributes to the housing needs of the area, in terms of type, size, tenure and reflecting the needs of the current and prospective community demographics, and what steps have been taken to make the development affordable for local people?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


• Housing type, size and tenure needs of current and future community demographics have been investigated and addressed

• That a statement of Community Involvement has been drawn up whereby type, size and tenure of the development can reflect current and future demographic trends.

2 (Good)

• The First Credit has been achieved.

• Affordability has been investigated and addressed through the identification of the numbers and the range of different types of affordable homes required for the development site.

3 (Best)

• The First and Second Credits have been achieved.

• The development incorporates innovative purchase models enabling local people to acquire housing with restrictive occupancy covenants placed as appropriate.


Guidance








2. Evidence that demonstrates that the demographic trends / requirements of the local community have influenced the proposed development through a Statement of Community Involvement, it should include the following:

a) type;

b) size;

c) tenure; and

d) reflecting the needs of the current and prospective community demographics

3. Community involvement can be part of the public consultation exercise if it can be demonstrated that the consultation exercise engaged with local people over housing demand.

Please Note: where the outcome of public consultation is negative, this does not mean that the development will not achieve this credit. Compliance can be demonstrated where this consultation exercise has taken place.

Two Credits (Good);


2. Housing affordability has been investigated and addressed through identifying the number of affordable housing required. In addition including a range of different types of affordable homes i.e. HomeBuy and Social HomeBuy.



2. Where evidence demonstrates that::

a) The development incorporates innovative purchase models enabling local people to acquire housing with restrictive occupancy covenants placed as appropriate.


Guidance





b) Documentation that provides details of partnership agreements (or equivalent) for community facilities.


Guidance





Compliance Notes

Statement of community involvement (SCI)

This must include as a minimum:

1. How they will involve stakeholders and the community in planning processes

2. How the development will reflect the needs of the existing community

3. How they intend to attract a diverse community

4. Will consult: Specific, General, and where applicable Government Bodies.

Specific Consultation bodies

Defined as:

• A relevant authority any part of whose area is in or adjoins the area of the local planning authority

• The Countryside Agency

• The Environment Agency

• Highways Agency

• Commission for Rural England

• Centre for Accessible Environments

• The Historic Buildings & Monuments Natural England

• Strategic Health Authority (Woking Area PCT, NHS Trust)

• Strategic Rail Authority

• Relevant telecommunications companies (Mobile Operators Association)

• Relevant utility companies

• Relevant sewerage and water undertakers

• Local Enterprise Partnership (or equivalent)


Guidance





General consultation bodies

These must be within the Local Authority area They are defined as:

• Voluntary bodies some or all of whose activities benefit any part of Local Authority area,

• Bodies which represent the interests of different racial, ethnic or national groups

• Bodies which represent the interests of different religious groups Bodies which represent the interests of disabled persons

• Bodies which represent the interests of persons carrying on business

Affordable Housing

The range of different types of affordable homes required for the development site must reflect the local requirements to ensure that people are housed appropriately. This should be lead by the relevant local bodies.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1 A statement of community involvement prepared on behalf of the developer, the Local Authority and / or third party that meets the needs of the community.

An investigation report (or equivalent) has been completed that shows how demographic trends have shaped or influenced the decisions made.

Req. 2 Minutes from the consultation meeting that outline the developers commitment to address the following:

• type;

• size;

• tenure; and

• reflecting the needs of the current and prospective community demographics.

Minutes from the consultation meeting that outline the developers commitment to address the following:

• type;

• size;

• tenure; and

• reflecting the needs of the current and prospective community demographics.

Req. 2 Minutes of consultation meetings indicating decisions taken and the reasons for them.

Second Credit

Req. 1 First credit has been achieved.

AND

• An investigation report (or equivalent) has been provided investigating the affordability of proposed homes on the new

An investigation report (or equivalent) has been completed that shows how demographic trends have shaped or influenced the decisions made.

It shows how the following housing needs of the area have been addressed within the investigation


Guidance





development.

report (or equivalent) in terms of:

• type;

• size;

• tenure; and

• reflecting the needs of the current and prospective community demographics

AND

That the developer has taken account of the feedback and in accordance with this has made changes to the final design.

Documentation of the number and types of affordable homes included on the development site.

Third Credit

Req. 1 The First and Second credits have been achieved.

The investigation report (or equivalent) shows that all stakeholders have been consulted and the information has been captured and utilised in the proposed development.

Req. 2 Documentation that demonstrates the commitment by the developer to incorporate innovative purchase models enabling local people to acquire housing with restrictive occupancy covenants placed as appropriate.

• Documentation that provides details of partnership agreements (or equivalent) for community facilities.

• Documentation that the development incorporates innovative purchase models enabling local people to acquire housing with restrictive occupancy covenants placed as appropriate.


Guidance






General Consultation Bodies: groups that are generally voluntary in nature that should be consulted in accordance with the Planning Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 and the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations 2004

Innovative Purchase Models: Home purchasing assistance models and schemes such as the ‘HomeBuy’ initiative run by the HCA.

Local Development Framework (LDF): A compendium of documents prepared by the district council, unitary authorities and national park authorities that outline a spatial planning strategy for their local area. They must include a Core Strategy, Site-Specific Allocations of land, a Proposals Map and these may contain additional optional development documents such as Area Action Plans. These are classed as DPDs outlining the key development goals of the Local Development Framework.

Partnership Agreement: a partnership agreement is a binding business contract run by a number of joint owners. These owners (partners) share the responsibility of running the business and therefore any decisions and actions made should be agreed by all partners

Specific Consultation Bodies: groups that must be consulted as required in accordance with the Planning Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 and the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) England Regulations 2004.


Guidance







SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 0.8

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 0.8

LON 0.8

Y&H 0.8


Guidance


PS8 – Affordable Housing Yes National ML ALL



Aim

To prevent social inequalities and foster a socially inclusive community by promoting effective integration of affordable housing within the development:

• Is the affordable housing indistinguishable from the rest of the development in terms of aesthetics and distribution?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum - Mandatory) Affordable housing is integrated evenly throughout the site.

2 (Good) Affordable housing is indistinguishable from other dwellings on the site.

3 (Best) Affordable housing is indistinguishable from other dwellings on the site and integrated evenly throughout the site.




• Where evidence demonstrates that affordable housing is integrated throughout the site.

Two Credits (Good);

• Where evidence demonstrates that affordable housing is indistinguishable from the other dwellings on the site.


Guidance






• Where evidence demonstrates that affordable housing is indistinguishable from other dwellings and integrated evenly throughout the site.

Compliance Notes

Please Note: If the development is 100% affordable housing three credits are achieved by default.

Compliance notes

Distribution Although BREEAM does not set the percentage distribution of site-wide affordable housing the credit aims are intended to enable the design team to use their discretion in this matter.

Housing Density When assessing housing density, account should be taken not only of the number of habitable rooms but occupancy rates. Different types of housing experience different occupation intensities that affect the overall development.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1 Site map or project outline that details affordable housing mix throughout the site.

Plans, drawings and specifications that provides confirmed details on the location of low income / social housing throughout the site.

Req. 2 Letter or correspondence from the developer that there is a commitment to include social housing throughout the site.

Where the developer has standard house types, drawings / designs of existing affordable housing types.

Req. 3 Written confirmation in regards to the affordable housing requirements of the development site from the Local Planning Authority.

Second Credit

Req. 1 Site map or project outline that details affordable housing mix throughout the site

Detailed plans, drawings and specifications that provides confirmed details on the location of affordable housing throughout the site.

Req. 2 Letter or correspondence from the developer that there is a commitment to include affordable housing throughout the site.


Req. 3 Written confirmation in regards to the affordable housing requirements of the development site from the Local


Guidance





Planning Authority.

Third Credit

Req. 1 Site map or project outline that details affordable housing mix throughout the site

Detailed plans, drawings and specifications that provides confirmed details on the location of affordable housing throughout the site.

Req. 2 Letter or correspondence from the developer that there is a commitment to include affordable throughout the site.


Req. 3 Written confirmation in regards to the affordable housing requirements of the development site from the Local Planning Authority.


Affordable housing: includes social rented and intermediate housing, provided to specified eligible households whose needs are not met by the market. Affordable housing should:

– Meet the needs of eligible households including availability at a cost low enough for them to afford, determined with regard to local incomes and local house prices; and include provisions for:

• The home to be retained for future eligible households; or

• If these restrictions are lifted, for any subsidy to be recycled for alternative affordable housing provision.

Social rented housing: rented housing owned and managed by local authorities and RSLs, for which guideline target rents are determined through the national rent regime. It may also include rented housing owned or managed by other persons and provided under equivalent rental arrangements to the above, as agreed with the local authority or with the Tenant Services Authority/ Homes and Communities Agency as a condition of grant.


Guidance





Intermediate affordable housing: housing at prices and rents above those of social rent but below the market price for nominalised rents, and which meet the criteria set out above. These can include shared equity (e.g. HomeBuy) and other low cost homes for sale, and intermediate rent.

Shared Equity: A home loan in which the lender gets a share of the equity of the home in exchange for providing a portion of the down payment. When the home is later sold, the lender is entitled to a portion of the proceeds.


Guidance







SE 0.8

SW 0.9

EoE 0.8

WM 0.8

EM 0.8

NW 1.0

NE N/A

LON 0.7

Y&H N/A


Guidance


PS9 – Secured by Design No National SML ALL

Form of Development


Aim

To recognise and encourage the implementation of effective design measures that will reduce the opportunity for and fear of crime on the new development.

• What percentage of buildings within the development have been designed to guidance requirements set out in ‘Secured by Design’ (or equivalent)?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) At least 40% of all buildings within the development have been designed to guidance requirements set out in ‘Secured by Design’ (or equivalent).

2 (Good)

Where 60% to 80% of all buildings within the development have been designed to guidance requirements set out in ‘Secured by Design’ (or equivalent).

AND

A ‘Secured by Design’ specialist, such as an Architectural Liaison Officer

(ALO) or Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA), or equivalent, has been consulted with during the outline proposals stage of the project.


Guidance



Form of Development


3 (Best)

More than 80% of all buildings within the development have been designed to guidance requirements set out in ‘Secured by Design’ (or equivalent).

AND

The final design embodies the recommendations of the special consultant such as an Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) or Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) and is built to conform to the principles and guidance of Secured by Design (or equivalent).

AND

The Local Planning Authority has been consulted and agrees with the recommendations and design principles outlined by the specialist consultant using the Secure by Design Guidelines.




• Where evidence demonstrates that the development has at least 40% of all buildings addressing the design principles set out in the ‘Secured by Design’ guidelines (or equivalent).

Two Credits (Good);

• Where evidence demonstrates that the development has between 60% and 80% of all buildings addressing the design principles set out in the ‘Secured by Design’ guidelines (or equivalent).

• Where evidence provided demonstrates there has been specialist involvement in the project such as an Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) or Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) or equivalent has been consulted.


Guidance



Form of Development



• Where evidence demonstrates that the development has greater than 80% of all buildings addressing the design principles set out in the ‘Secured by Design’ guidelines (or equivalent).

AND

• The final design embodies the recommendations of the special consultant such as an Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) or Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) and is built to conform to the principles and guidance of Secured by Design (or equivalent).

AND

• Where evidence demonstrates that the LPA has been consulted and agrees with the recommendations and design principles outlined by the specialist consultant using the ‘Secured by Design’ guidelines.

Compliance Notes

Secured By Design Award

An actual Secured by Design Award / certificate is not required at the planning stage. However evidence must be provided that an ALO (or equivalent) has been consulted at the relevant design stage to provide input into the design.


Guidance



Form of Development




First Credit

Req. 1 A copy of the specification clause confirming:

• The development conforming to ‘Secured By Design’ principles and guidance.

• Designated buildings that meet the 40% requirement.

A copy of a report completed in accordance to the design principles set out in the ‘Secured by Design’ guidelines:

• The report demonstrates that the development has at least 40% of all buildings addressing the above requirements.

Req. 2 A marked-up copy of the site / design plan(s) highlighting examples of:

• The development conforming to ‘Secured By Design’ principles and guidance.

Second Credit

Req. 1 • A letter of appointment of an appropriately qualified specialist consultant:

• ALO / CODA or equivalent.

Correspondence from or a copy of the report/feedback from the ALO / CPDA

confirming:

• Summary of their recommendations.

Req. 2 Correspondence from or a copy of the initial summary report / feedback from the ALO / CPDA (or equivalent)

confirming:

• Scope of their advice / involvement. Designated buildings that meet the 60% to 80% requirement.

A copy of a the report completed in accordance to the design principles set out in the ‘Secured by Design’ guidelines:

• the report demonstrates that the development has between 60% and 80% of all buildings addressing the above requirements.


Guidance



Form of Development


Req. 3 Written confirmation from the developer stating that:

• The development will conform to ALO / CPDA (or equivalent) recommendations.

A marked-up copy of the site/design plan(s) highlighting examples of:

• The development conforming to ALO / CPDA recommendations and SBD principles and guidance.

Third Credit

Req. 1 A letter of Appointment of appropriate qualified specialist consultant:

• ALO / CODA or equivalent.

Correspondence from or a copy of the report / feedback from the ALO / CPDA

confirming:

• Summary of their recommendations

Req. 2 Correspondence from or a copy of the report/feedback from the ALO / CPDA

confirming:

• Scope of their advice / involvement.

• Designated buildings that meet the greater than 80% requirement.

A copy of a the report completed in accordance to the design principles set out in the ‘Secured by Design’ guidelines:

• the report demonstrates that the development has more than 80% of all buildings addressing the above requirements.

Req. 3 Written confirmation from the developer stating that:

• The development will conform to ALO / CPDA (or equivalent) recommendations and ‘Secured By Design’ principles and guidance.

A marked-up copy of the site / design plan(s) highlighting examples of:

• The development conforming to ALO / CPDA recommendations and ‘Secured By Design’ principles and guidance.

Req. 4 Confirmation of initial correspondence that the LPA will be consulted as part of the broader ‘Secured by Design’ engagement.

Written confirmation that the LPA has been consulted and agrees with the recommendations and design principles outlined by the ALO / CPDA specialist consultant using the ‘Secure by Design’ guidelines.


Guidance



Form of Development



Secured by Design (SBD): A police initiative that seeks to encourage the construction industry to adopt crime prevention measures in the design of developments, to assist in reducing the opportunity for and fear of crime (www.securedbydesign.com).

Secured by Design is owned by the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) and has the support of the Home Office Crime Reduction & Community Safety Group and the Planning Section of the Department for Communities and Local Government.

The Association of Chief Police Officers for England Wales and Northern Ireland (ACPO) and the Association of Chief Police Officers for Scotland (ACPOS) represent the police forces of the United Kingdom and both organisations endorse and support the Secured by Design programme.

The Safer Parking Scheme: An initiative of the Association of Chief Police Officers aimed at reducing crime and the fear of crime in parking facilities. Safer parking status, Park Mark®, is awarded to parking facilities that have met the requirements of a risk assessment conducted by the Police. The scheme is managed by the British Parking Association (BPA) and supported by the Home Office and Scottish Executive.

Development Managers: DMs are independent persons appointed by the SPS scheme managers (the British Parking Association) and will assist designated police staff in carrying out site assessments of individual parking facilities.

http://www.securedbydesign.com)


Guidance



Form of Development




SE 0.8

SW N/A

EoE 0.8

WM 0.8

EM 0.8

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.8

Y&H N/A


Guidance


PS10 – Active Frontages No National SML ALL

Form of Development


Aim

To ensure that building frontages encourage pedestrian usage of the streets, helping to make a place feel more vibrant and contributing to vitality:

• Have Active Frontage Guidelines been met in order to promote vitality?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) 100% achieves at least Grade C, 50% meet Grade B.

2 (Good) 100% achieves at least Grade C frontage, 25% Grade A.

3 (Best) 100% achieves at least Grade C frontage, 50% Grade A.

Please Note: where the relevant Local Authority has developed their own Design Guide with relation to Active Frontages, these will take precedent over the Urban Design Compendium.




1. Where evidence demonstrates that the development has met the following guidance requirements set out in the Urban Design Compendium in regards to buildings and their active frontage:

• 100% achieves at least Grade C, 50% meet Grade B.

2. Where evidence demonstrates that the design team has consulted with and sought the advice of the local authority or consultant on designing out ‘inactive’ frontages.

Two Credits (Good);



Guidance



Form of Development


2. Where evidence demonstrates that the development has met the following guidance requirements set out in the Urban Design Compendium in regards to buildings and their active frontage:

• 100% achieves at least Grade C frontage, 25% Grade A.

3. Where evidence demonstrates that consultation with key stakeholders (including the local planning authority) occurred during or prior to the Outline Proposals stage (RIBA stage C) or equivalent.


1. The First and Second Credit requirements have been achieved.

2. Where evidence demonstrates that the design of the proposed development has met the following guidance requirements set out in the Urban Design Compendium in regards to buildings and their active frontage:

• 100% achieves at least Grade C frontage, 50% Grade A.

3. The final design embodies the recommendations of the key stakeholders (including the local planning authority) and the development form is built to address the principles and guidance of Urban Design Compendium (or equivalent).


Guidance



Form of Development


Compliance Notes

Grade A Frontage

• More than 15 premises every 100m • No blind facades and few passive ones

• More than 25 doors and windows every 100m

• Much depth and relief in the building surface

• A large range of functions • High quality materials and refined details

Grade B Frontage

• 10 to 15 premises every 100m • A few blind or passive facades

• More than 15 doors and windows every 100m

• Some depth and modelling in the building surface

• A moderate range of functions • Good quality materials and refined details

Grade C Frontage

• 6 to 10 premises every 100m • Very little depth and modelling in the building surface

• Some range of functions • Standard materials and few details

• Less than half blind or passive facades

Grade D Frontage

• 3 to 5 premises every 100m • Flat building surfaces

• Little or no range of functions • Few or no details


Guidance



Form of Development


• Predominantly blind or passive facades

Grade E Frontage

• 1 or 2 premises every 100m • Flat building surfaces

• No range of functions • No details and nothing to look at

• Predominantly blind or passive facades

Please Note: where 100% of the development meets the Grade B classification the assessor can award 1 (one) Credit.


Guidance



Form of Development




First Credit

Req. 1 Written confirmation that the design team has committed to consulting with the local authority on designing out ‘inactive’ frontages.

Copy of meeting minutes demonstrating that the LPA has been consulted in regards designing out ‘inactive’ frontages.

OR

Copy of written correspondence from the LPA in regards to the developments commitment to design out ‘inactive’ frontages.

Req. 2 Example cross-sectional diagrams of the development’s commitment to achieving the design principle set out in the Urban Design Compendium (UDC) guidance (or equivalent).

Copy of the cross-sectional diagrams that indicate what grade under the UDC guidance the frontage meets and the location that it is in (linked to the site plans).

Req. 3 Written commitment from the developer to achieving the design principles set out in the UDC guidance (or equivalent).

Copy of a site wide plan indicating the specific locations that ‘active frontages’ as outline by cross-sectional diagram have been (or are proposed to be) located throughout the site.

Second Credit

Req. 1 Written confirmation demonstrating that the design team will consult with key stakeholders (including the local planning authority) before or prior to the Outline Proposals stage (RIBA stage C).

Copy of meeting minutes demonstrating that consultation with key stakeholders (including the local planning authority) occurred during or prior to the Outline Proposals stage (RIBA stage C) or equivalent.

Req. 2 Example cross-sectional diagrams of the development’s commitment to achieving the design principle set out in the Urban Design Compendium guidance (or

Copy of the cross-sectional diagrams that indicate what grade under the UDC guidance the frontage meets and the location that it is in (linked to the site


Guidance



Form of Development


equivalent). plans).

Req. 3 Written commitment from the developer to achieving the design principles set out in the UDC guidance (or equivalent).

Copy of a site wide plan indicating the specific locations that ‘active frontages’ as outline by cross-sectional diagram have been (or are proposed to be) located throughout the site.

Third Credit

Written confirmation by the developer to consult with key stakeholders (including the local planning authority) and address the key recommendations to ensure that the development form is built to address the principles and guidance of Urban Design Compendium (or equivalent).

Copy of a final design report that embodies the recommendations of the key stakeholders (including the local planning authority) and the development form is built to address the principles and guidance of Urban Design Compendium (or equivalent).

Req. 2 Example cross-sectional diagrams of the development’s commitment to achieving the design principle set out in the Urban Design Compendium guidance (or equivalent).

Copy of the cross-sectional diagrams that indicate what grade under the UDC guidance the frontage meets and the location that it is in (linked to the site plans).

Req. 3 Copy of a site wide plan indicating the specific locations that ‘active frontages’ as outline by cross-sectional diagram have been (or are proposed to be) located throughout the site.


Active Frontages: Making frontages ‘active’ adds interest, life and vitality to the public realm. This means:

• frequent doors and windows, with few blank walls;

• narrow frontage buildings, giving vertical rhythm to the street scene;


Guidance



Form of Development


• articulation of facades, with projections such as bays and porches incorporated, providing a welcoming feeling;

• live internal uses visible from the outside, or spilling onto the street on occasion.

The Urban Design Compendium: www.urbandesigncompendium.co.uk

http://www.urbandesigncompendium.co.uk


Guidance



Form of Development




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 0.7

WM 0.8

EM 0.8

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 1.0

Y&H N/A


Guidance


PS11 – Defensible Spaces No National SML ALL

Form of Development


Aim

To create defensible spaces that clearly defines public and private spaces:

• Will the development make a clear distinction between public fronts and private backs, allowing for secure gardens, parking or delivery access at the rear and an overlooked, safe public realm?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) 80% of building frontages face onto the street.

2 (Good) 100% of building frontages face onto the street.

3 (Best) 100% of building frontages face onto the street and there are no exposed backs.



One Credit (Minimum):

• Where evidence provided demonstrates that 80% of building frontages face onto the street.

Two Credits (Good):

• Where evidence provided demonstrates that 100% of building frontages face onto the street.

Three Credits (Best):

• Where evidence provided demonstrates that 100% of building frontages face onto the street and there are no exposed backs.


Guidance



Form of Development


Compliance Notes

Building Frontage The linear measurement of a building facing any adjacent public street or a commercial centre’s common area. Active frontages should ideally relate to ground floor retail spaces, cafes, restaurants and bars. However they can also include hotel public facilities, office receptions, galleries and public facilities.


Guidance



Form of Development




All Credits

Req. 1 Copy of the (draft) masterplan showing the following information:

• location of each building on the development site.

• orientation of each building in relation to the proposed street layout (or existing streets).

• clearly marked entrance for each building.

Copy of the final masterplan showing the following information:

• location of each building on the development site.

• orientation of each building in relation to the proposed street layout (or existing streets).

• clearly marked entrance for each building.

Please Note: where building types are unknown commitment must be made within the masterplan to the access points of these building(s) and that these clearly demonstrate that there will be no exposed backs and that the main access point faces onto the street.


Guidance



Form of Development



Defensible Spaces: a concept of influencing negative social behavior through architectural and urban design. Exposed Backs: New buildings should not present blank facades to the street . All elevations fronting onto streets and public spaces should include windows on the ground and upper floors. All buildings should face onto the street and take their main access from it. It is not acceptable to access office or residential accommodation solely from car parking at the rear or in the basement.


Guidance



Form of Development




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 0.9

NE 0.9

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.9


Guidance


PS12 – Local Vernacular No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Urban Design


Aim

To ensure that the development responds to local character whilst reinforcing its own identity:

• Will the appearance of the development be visually appropriate, taking into consideration local character studies, and will it complement local character whilst creating a strong identity for the new neighbourhood?

A: Building materials and colour complementing local character.

B: Building style and form enhancing local character.

C: Roofscapes visually respecting the development’s location within a local context.

D: Continuity of local building details such as windows and doors.

E: Residential component of the development fostering a potential for personalisation. by prospective residents.

F: Contemporary approach to reflecting the local vernacular.

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) A design strategy addressing all above issues.

2 (Good) A design strategy addressing all above issues based on consultation with the local planning authority.

3 (Best) A design strategy addressing all above issues, which includes a study of the character of the local area and bases design solutions on the local vernacular, is developed and based on consultation with the local planning authority.


Guidance



Urban Design





• A design strategy OR guide has been developed for the development site building upon items A – F.

• It can be demonstrated that this strategy will be implemented throughout the development.

Note: zoning is allowed for this Credit as long as within each zone items A – F are consistent.

Two Credits (Good);


AND

2. The Design Guide has the support of the local Planning Officer as being appropriate for the local vernacular.

3. Evidence demonstrates that the Planning Officer was consulted on the development of the Design Guide and supports items A – F being implemented within the new development.



AND

2. The Guidance responds to Local Authority Design Guidance with demonstrable links between the two.

3. The developer has implemented Local Authority Design Guidance, with support from the Planning Officer, and evidence demonstrates that this will be implemented throughout the development site.

4. The developer / designer has provided a design review with local examples of design / building typologies that the new development follows.


Guidance



Urban Design


Compliance Notes

Local Authority Design Guidance

Where the Local Authority has developed Design Guidance to shape the architectural style of local development the developer / designer must demonstrate that Design Guidance developed for the site has taken account of this.

Where there is no Local Authority Guidance equivalent guidance can be sought from recognised national design bodies.

For links to Local Authority Design Guidance please refer to: http://www.rudi.net/information_zone/design_guides_and_codes

http://www.rudi.net/information_zone/design_guides_and_codes


Guidance



Urban Design




First Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has committed to delivering a design guide for the development site addressing items A – F.

• Where the developer has already developed a specific design guide for the relevant development site evidence must clearly demonstrate that items A – F have been addressed in full.

• A copy of the final design guide developed for the site that is undertaking assessment, with items A – F clearly addressed.

• The design guide should make clear reference to these items and provide evidence of how they will be resolved within the new development.

Second Credit

Req. 1

• The First Credit has been achieved. • The First Credit has been achieved.

Req. 2

• The Design Guide has the support of a relevant Local Planning Officer in the form of:

o Letter of endorsement.

o Evidence that they were consulted in the development of the guidance and support the outcome.

o Items A – F have been addressed in full.

• Commitment from the developer that the design guide will be implemented IN FULL within the new development.


PLUS

• Where available, early concept designs / drawings of buildings to be developed on site demonstrating that they have responded to the Design Guide.


Guidance



Urban Design


Third Credit

Req. 1

• The First and Second Credit have been achieved.


Req. 2

• Evidence demonstrates that the Design Guide has responded to a Local Authority (or equivalent) Design Guide.

• As for Outline Planning stage, with the relevant sections of the Design Guide demonstrating how it meets the requirements of the Local Authority Design Guide (or equivalent).

Req. 3

• The developer has implemented Local Authority Design Guidance (or equivalent) and evidence demonstrates that the relevant local Planning Officer was consulted through its development

• Evidence demonstrates that this will be implemented throughout the development site, either through site drawings / plans or firm commitments from the developer to follow the Design Guidance in full.

• As for Outline Planning Stage.

• Copy of the final design guidance with relevant sections highlighting how the development has sought local design references and that these are included within the new development.


The Design Guidance developed for the site can be used in conjunction with this Credit to meet the requirements of PS15 where it can be demonstrated that the Compliance Requirements of this Credit have been met. Equivalent benchmarks MUST be met (i.e.’Good’ in PS12 and ‘Good’ in PS15.


Guidance



Urban Design




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance


PS13 - Security Lighting No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Security


Aim

To ensure that lighting on the development site is designed to reduce light pollution:

• Will the lighting strategy be designed to minimise light pollution?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) To be set by the local planning authority – see relevant local standards.

(As a Minimum this should refer to street lighting AND external security lighting designed into dwellings and provided by developer).

2 (Good)

Appropriate high-efficiency lighting type, position, footprint, timings and duration planned into lighting systems.

PLUS

Domestic external security lighting is designed into dwellings and provided by the developer.

3 (Best) 100% high efficiency street lighting with limited upward light transmission.




• The lighting design guide for the development has been completed inline with relevant Local Authority Guidance.

• As a Minimum this MUST refer to street lighting AND any security lighting that will be provided by the developer on residential units.


Guidance



Security


Two Credits (Good);


AND

2. Appropriate high-efficientcy lighting type, position, footprint, timings and duration planned into lighting systems to maximise security / minimise pollution from lighting.

PLUS

3. Domestic external security lighting is designed into dwellings and provided by the developer.



AND

2. 100% high efficiency street lighting with limited upward light transmission.


Guidance



Security


Compliance Notes

Security Lighting Domestic security lighting must be an integrated solution and not simply an ‘add on’. For further information please refer to Code for Sustainable Homes Credit Ene6 ‘External Lighting’.

Street Lighting Developers should refer to recognised standards for the Design of Street Lighting.

In addition lighting guidance from the Urban Design Compendium should be sought: www.urbandesigncompendium.co.uk/public/documents/UDC2FULL.pdf

Additional Lighting Any additional lighting that is provided within the development should be designed to minimise disruption to local residents. Where applicable this should include sports pitches / sports facilities, commercial areas, car parks etc.

http://www.urbandesigncompendium.co.uk/public/documents/UDC2FULL


Guidance



Security




First Credit

Req. 1

• Evidence of local lighting design guidance / requirements (or equivalent national standard) with clear reference to ALL public lighting and security lighting that is provided on domestic dwellings.

• Evidence demonstrates that the developer has followed relevant local design guidance (or equivalent) in the design and installation of lighting on site.

• The design guide refers clearly to ALL public lighting that will be provided by the developer.

• Any private (domestic) security lighting that the developer is installing has been incorporated within building design.

Second Credit

Req. 1


Req. 2

• The Design Guidance makes reference to the appropriate high-efficient lighting type, position, footprint, timings and duration planned into lighting systems within the development.

• The developer has provided a copy of the relevant lighting design guidance which demonstrates the use of:

o high-efficientcy lighting type

o position

o footprint (i.e. lit area)

o timings

o and duration planned into lighting systems.

Req. 3

• Where applicable security lighting is designed into domestic dwellings / units.

• Security lighting designed for domestic buildings has been designed to comply with the Code for Sustainable Homes


Guidance



Security


Credit Ene6 ‘External Lighting’ (with reference to Security Lighting).

Third Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has made commitments to install lighting / provide a lighting design guide that minimises uplighting and light pollution arising from the site.

• The First and Second Credit has been achieved

Req. 2

• Specifications confirm that the lighting is ‘low energy’ (i.e. LED lighting).

• Evidence demonstrates that the installed lighting will be 100% low powered street lighting with limited upward light transmission.

• Specifications from Lighting Design Guide and products that will be installed are included.

Req. 3

• Commitment from the developer that a lighting design guide will be developed for the site and that this will be undertaken in a way which will reduce light pollution arising from the development site.

• A copy of the final lighting design guide for the development outlining how light pollution will be minimised, and the specification of the lighting confirming (where possible) it is low powered and designed / installed to reduce light pollution.




Guidance



Security




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance


PS14 - Form of Development No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Connectivity


Aim

To achieve visual and physical connectivity that makes it easy to find the development and to navigate around:

• Are there physical and visual links between the development and the surrounding area, and how do they integrate the development with the surrounding area?

A: Are new routes into the site continuations of existing access points from the surrounding area?

B: How direct are sight lines of existing neighbourhood streets continued through the site?

C: Are main routes within the site connected directly to main routes in the wider area without feeding through existing routes with less capacity or with a primarily residential function?

Assessment Criteria

Credits



3 (Best) A design strategy addressing all above issues, which includes a study of the character of the local area and bases design solutions on the local vernacular, is developed and based on consultation with the local planning authority.




• A design strategy OR guide has been developed for the development site building upon items A – C.


Guidance



Connectivity



Note: zoning is allowed for this Credit as long as within each zone items A – C are consistent.

Two Credits (Good);


AND


3. Evidence demonstrates that the Planning Officer was consulted on the development of the Design Guide and supports items A – C being implemented within the new development.



AND




Guidance



Connectivity


Compliance Notes





Guidance



Connectivity




First Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has committed to delivering a design guide for the development site addressing items A – C.

• Where the developer has already developed a specific design guide for the relevant development site evidence must clearly demonstrate that items A – C have been addressed in full.

• A copy of the final design guide developed for the site that is undertaking assessment, with items A – C clearly addressed.


• This could include final drawings / 3D models showing how items A – C have been resolved.

Second Credit

Req. 1


Req. 2




o Items A – C have been addressed in full.



PLUS



Guidance



Connectivity


Third Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2



Req. 3



• Final drawings / designs clearly demonstrate that items A – C have been resolved within the final development plan, with strict guidance on conforming to the items in the list.

• In addition the developer has met Requirement 3 at the Outline Planning Stage.


The Design Guidance developed for the site can be used in conjunction with this Credit to meet the requirements of PS12 where it can be demonstrated that the Compliance Requirements of this Credit have been met. Equivalent benchmarks MUST be met (i.e. ’Good’ in PS15 and ‘Good’ in PS12).


Guidance



Connectivity




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance



Pedestrian Movement


Aim

To promote walking as an alternative to vehicle use for short journeys:

• Will the proposed street network provide a high quality public realm with a pedestrian friendly environment?

A: Has a choice of good pedestrian routes connecting to services and places people want to use been provided?

B: Are pedestrian routes direct with safe crossings at points where pedestrians want to cross?

C: Has a design strategy been produced to ensure that pedestrian routes are attractive, well-lit and safe?

D: Will street design calm traffic where appropriate? To create a place with a clear identity that is easy to understand and navigate.

Assessment Criteria

Credits



3 (Best) A design strategy addressing all above issues, which includes or refers to a study of the character of the local area and based on consultation with the local planning authority.




• A design strategy OR guide has been developed for the development site building upon items A – D.



Guidance



Pedestrian Movement


Note: zoning is allowed for this Credit as long as within each zone items A – D are consistent.

Two Credits (Good);


AND


3. Evidence demonstrates that the Planning Officer was consulted on the development of the Design Guide and supports items A – D being implemented within the new development.



AND




Guidance



Pedestrian Movement


Compliance Notes




For links to Local Authority Design Guidance please refer to: http://www.rudi.net/information_zone/design_guides_and_codes

http://www.rudi.net/information_zone/design_guides_and_codes


Guidance



Pedestrian Movement




First Credit

Req. 1

• The developer has committed to delivering a design guide for the development site addressing items A – D.

• Where the developer has already developed a specific design guide for the relevant development site evidence must clearly demonstrate that items A – D have been addressed in full.

• A copy of the final design guide developed for the site that is undertaking assessment, with items A – D clearly addressed.


Second Credit

Req. 1


Req. 2




o Items A – D have been addressed in full.



PLUS



Guidance



Pedestrian Movement


Third Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2



Req. 3







Guidance



Pedestrian Movement




SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Transport


Guidance

Transport Mandatory Status Size Type

TRA1 – Location / Capacity No Regional SML ALL

Public Transport


Aim

To encourage and enable the use of public transport:

• Will the development be within an existing public transport corridor?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that the development will be within an existing public transport corridor, but that the capacity is either unknown or requires additional capacity.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that the development will be within an existing public transport corridor, and sufficient capacity to accommodate users of the proposed development can be brought on-stream during the build process.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that the development will be within an existing public transport corridor, and excess capacity already exists which can accommodate users of the development.




1. Confirmation that the development is located within an existing public transport corridor from:

a) the Local Authority;

and / or

b) Public Transport Provider.

2. Confirmation that the service capacity within the public transport corridor is either unknown or requires additional services (increase required) from:


Guidance



Public Transport



and / or


3. Confirmation that additional capacity is required for the proposed development, and has been determined through a survey or statistical analysis, addressing the following factors:

• Identify the analysis period, particularly the peak hours of the development and / or the entire transport system;

• Establish the total person trip generation from the proposed development for all travel modes;

• Estimate the likely modal split for the public transport network (buses, rail and tram);

• Identify the public transport services relevant to, and in the vicinity of, the proposed development;

• Estimate the existing capacity of the bus / train / tram service by multiplying the number of services by the maximum passenger capacity for each mode (bus, train carriages);

• Estimate the current level of patronage or usage on the public transport network, using the most comprehensive data publicly available;

• Estimate the spare capacity on the public transport network;

• Identify measures to address any shortfall in capacity, where applicable;

• If the spare capacity is unknown, this must be confirmed by the Local Authority and the service provider.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Confirmation that the development is located within an existing public transport corridor from:


and / or



Guidance



Public Transport


2. Confirmation of the spare capacity, either in the form of a survey or statistics, analysing the following factors:

• Identify the analysis period, particularly the peak hours of the development and / or the entire transport system;

• Establish the total person trip generation from the proposed development for all travel modes;

• Estimate the likely modal split for the public transport network (buses, rail and tram);

• Identify the public transport services relevant to, and in the vicinity of, the proposed development;

• Estimate the existing capacity of the bus/train/tram service by multiplying the number of services by the maximum passenger capacity for each mode (bus, train carriages);

• Estimate the current level of patronage or usage on the public transport network, using the most comprehensive data publicly available;

• Estimate the spare capacity on the public transport network;

• Identify measures to address any shortfall in capacity, where applicable.


1. As for first and second credits.

2. Confirmation from the Local Authority and / or the service provider that excess already exists which can accommodate users of the development.

3. Confirmation from the Local Authority and the service provider that sufficient capacity exists to accommodate users of developments and additional services can and will be brought on-stream during the build process.


Guidance



Public Transport


Compliance Notes

Existing Transport Corridor

Defined as any route served by a regular public transport service.

Capacity Transport Capacity is defined as the maximum number of people that can be transported via a public transport service. ALL potential users of the development must be able to access the transport facility within the defined boundaries as set out in TRA2.


Guidance



Public Transport




First Credit

Req. 1

A marked up plan of the development and surrounding areas, showing the public transport nodes already in existence.

Confirmation from the Local Authority and / or service provider that the development is located within a public transport corridor.

Second Credit

Req. 1

First credit requirements have been addressed and achieved.

Evidence (in the form of statistics or a survey) confirming the spare capacity and the transport nodes.

Req. 2

Initial results and confirmation that outline that sufficient spare capacity in the local area can be brought on-stream during the build process to meet the needs of the proposed development.

Confirmation* from Local Authority and service providers that sufficient capacity to accommodate users of development can be brought on-stream during the build process.

*This can be in the form of letters and reference to the statistics or survey undertaken for the first credit, highlighting the capacity information for relevant modes and occupancy figures of the development.

Third Credit

Req. 1

First and Second Credit requirements have been addressed and achieved.

Evidence (as outlined above) confirming the spare capacity and the transport nodes.

Req. 2

Initial results and confirmation that outline that there is excess spare capacity in the local area network

Confirmation from Local Authority and service providers that excess spare capacity to accommodate users of


Guidance



Public Transport


to meet the needs of the proposed development.

development is already in existence which can accommodate users of the development, in the form of letters and reference to the statistics or survey undertaken for the first credit, highlighting the capacity information for relevant modes, timetabling, road traffic information, and occupancy figures of the development.


Public transport corridor: Can be defined as a route served by bus, train, tram or other form of public transport.


Guidance



Public Transport




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.7

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


TRA2 – Availability / Frequency No Regional SML ALL

Public Transport


Aim

To ensure the availability of frequent and convenient public transport links to fixed public transport nodes (train, bus, tram or tube) and local centres:

• What will be the furthest distance that any occupier will have to walk, using safe routes to access a regular public / community transport service?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that a regular public transport node is located at a safe, walkable distance according to the location of the development:

• 2km outside of designated ‘town centres’.

• 1km within designated ‘town centres’.

2 (Good)


• 1.5km outside of designated ‘town centres’.

• 750m within designated ‘town centres’.

3 (Best)


• 1km outside of designated ‘town centres’.

• 500m within designated ‘town centres’.

Please Note: The definition of town centres includes existing built up urban areas.


Guidance



Public Transport





1. The distance from each building entrance on the development must be within the following:

a) 2km outside of designated ‘town centres’.

b) 1km within designated ‘town centres’.

2. The transport node must have a service at least every 10 / 15 (peak / off peak) minutes in urban areas and every 30 minutes / 1 hour (peak / off peak) in rural areas to a local centre or a key services centre between 08:00 - 19:00 (hours).

3. The route from the development to the public or community transport node must be safe and walkable.

Two Credits (Good);

1. As for the first credit


a) 1.5km outside of designated ‘town centres’.

b) 750m within designated ‘town centres’.


1. As for the first two credits.


a) 1km outside of designated ‘town centres’.

b) 500m within designated ‘town centres’.


Guidance



Public Transport


Compliance Notes

1. Where a transport node is served by more than one service going to a local urban centre, the frequency between services can be used as the frequency for assessment. For example, where there are three services, each with a 30 minute frequency but each follows on 10 minutes after the other, and then the frequency used for assessment purposes would be 10 minutes.

2. Where there is more than one transport node but it serves different proximities of the buildings / units / plots, e.g. one node at 400m and another at 600m (i.e. one within 500m and another within 750m) then each node should be assessed separately and credit awarded for the worst performing node.

Please Note: where there is more than one node and each serves a different purpose (i.e. train station versus a bus stop) the worst case scenario must be awarded.

3. The nodes’ proximity and frequency should be assessed for each building separately and then the resulting credits should be averaged to obtain the credits awarded to the whole development.

Please Note: where building types are unknown notional entrance points must be marked on the masterplan and measurement taken from this point, assuming reasonable distance from this point to the building entrance.

4. Distance should not be measured 'as the crow flies' and must be measured via a safe pedestrian route (please refer to Compliance Note 7) from the main building entrance to the nearest public transport node that complies with the criteria.

5. A local centre is defined as any community focal point, served by a transport network. This includes local shops and / or community facilities, (e.g. bank, library, school), a major transport node, (i.e. a railway, bus station) or another type of significant non-leisure related meeting place.

6. Regular / frequent is defined as being every 10 / 15 minutes in urban areas during peak / off peak times and half hourly / hourly for peak / off-peak periods in rural locations.

7. A safe pedestrian route must have the following characteristics:

a) Lighting design of pedestrian pathways must be in compliance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6, 1992 (LG6) and BS5489 Part 1.

b) Where dedicated pedestrian crossing of a vehicle access route is provided, the road must be raised to pavement level (i.e. the pavement is not lowered to road level).


Guidance



Public Transport


c) For larger developments with a high number of public users / visitors, pedestrian pathways must be signposted to public transport nodes.

d) The carriageway of low-traffic roads with a speed limit of 20mph or below.

e) A footpath of >900mm.

8. In the case of rural developments only the following must be adhered to:

a) A grass verge can be accepted, but must be reasonably level, is at least 900m in unobstructed width and is continuous.

b) Roads without a speed limit of 20mph must have traffic calming measures in place and the road must be well lit.

c) In roads with a speed limit of 50mph, the road must be well lit, the pedestrian route must be contained within the length of the road, without sharp bends or significant junctions, and with a clear line of sight for at least 300m in either direction from the crossing point.

9. When any pedestrian routes cross a vehicular road with a speed limit of more than 20mph (except in a rural area) a safe crossing point must be provided.

10. Where none of the above safe crossing points are provided, crossing can be allowed in exceptional circumstances on a 30mph road if it can be proven that significant measures have been taken to reduce the speed to 20mph or below. Such measures include chicanes, traffic humps or any other type of traffic calming measures. At the point of crossing, the road must also be well-lit and there should be a clear line of sight for at least 300m in each direction.


Guidance



Public Transport


Schedule of evidence required


First Credit

Req. 1

A master plan of the site, highlighting the public transport nodes and the relevant distances from proposed buildings.

If transport node(s) do not already exist, a timescale is required as to when the node(s) will be available.

A detailed plan of the site plus design drawings, highlighting the public transport nodes and the relevant distances from proposed units and building entrances.

The plan must also be marked with the proposed safe pedestrian route, detailing footpaths, crossing points, etc.

Req. 2

Details of the public transport provision:

• Routes served

• Frequency of services at peak times

• Details of local urban centres.

Confirmation by the public transport provider that if the proposed transport node(s) do not already exist, that they will be created to a timescale prior to the completion of the development (as agreed by the local planning authority).

Second Credit

Req. 1






Confirmation by the public transport provider that if the proposed transport


Guidance



Public Transport


Req. 2 • Routes served



node(s) do not already exist, that they will be created to a timescale prior to the completion of the development (as agreed by the local planning authority).

Third Credit

Req. 1





Req. 2


• Routes served



Confirmation by the public transport provider that if the proposed transport node(s) do not already exist, that they will be created to a timescale prior to the completion of the development (as agreed by the local planning authority).


Use of public transport networks for commuting is affected by a number of factors relating to convenience and predictability. These are often impossible to assess without an in-depth study. However, the availability of a good accessible service significantly improves the likelihood that people will use it for travel to and from the development.


Guidance



Public Transport


Glossary of terms

Transport nodes: This can be a bus stop, tram stop, underground station or railway station.

Safe crossing point: This can be a subway, footbridge, traffic island, zebra, pelican, toucan or puffin crossing, or where there is a crossing point controlled by a police officer, a school crossing patrol or a traffic warden.


Guidance



Public Transport




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 0.9

WM N/A

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE 1.0

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.9


Guidance


TRA3 – Facilities No National SML ALL

Public Transport


Aim

To encourage more frequent use of public transport during the entire year, by having waiting areas which are considered safe and out of the weather:

• What provision will be made for a safe bus, tram or train shelter or waiting rooms?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that a safe, well lit and openly visible shelter for bus, tram or train is provided.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that safe, comfortable, well lit and openly visible shelters for bus, tram or train are provided, with timetable information and seating.

3 (Best)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that safe, comfortable, well-lit and openly visible bus, tram and train waiting areas are provided, in key locations, with access to real time timetable information, and these areas are covered by the use of CCTV, if deemed necessary by the Local Authority.




1. Provision has been made for a shelter which is located on a well lit pedestrian pathway, as defined by the CIBSE Lighting Guide 6 1992 (LG6) and BS5489 Part 1.

OR

Provision has been made for a shelter which is located within a train, tram or bus station.


Guidance



Public Transport


2. The shelter must be of adequate size to accommodate the users of the development, as judged through consultation with service providers and the Local Authority.

3. The shelter must be openly visible to the surrounding environment and community.

4. The shelter must provide the occupant with shelter from the elements.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The first credit is achieved.

2. The shelter must provide sufficient seating for the users of the development as judged through consultation with service providers and the Local Authority.

3. The shelter must have timetabling information prominently on display in the shelter, and this information must be kept up-to-date.


1. The first and second credits are achieved.

2. The shelters must be located close to key locations, such as:

a) Schools

b) Shops

c) Libraries

d) Old peoples’ homes

e) Hospitals

3. The shelter should have real-time timetable information.

4. Where crime is considered to be an issue by the Local Authority, CCTV should be installed to cover the shelter and the surrounding area.

Please Note: where the development is Small in size Credits can be awarded by default if there is a safe shelter within 400 metres of the development and that this can be accessed via a safe pedestrian route.


Guidance



Public Transport


Compliance Notes

Shelter Dimensions

The dimensions for shelters is location specific and should be decided through consultation with the Local Authority, who in turn should relate their decision to the size of the development and the expected usage of the shelter.

Pavement obstruction

Bus shelters should provide minimum obstruction to the pavement and a recommended width of 1.8m should be allowed for passing passengers.

Seating Where seats are provided they should be in bright, “warm” materials with a non-slip surface, which is strong, easy to clean and quick to dry. Slatted wood or plastic coated metal comply with these requirements, however other materials will be considered.

Existing Shelters On Small sites Credits can be awarded by default where existing bus shelters are within 400m of ALL dwellings / buildings.


Guidance



Public Transport




First Credit

Req. 1

Plans / design drawings of the site, highlighting the public transport stops.

Detailed plans and cross sectional design drawings of the site, highlighting the public transport stops.

Req. 2

Commitment to ensure that the development meets the lighting design requirement for pedestrian pathways as outlined under the CIBSE Lighting Guide 6, 1992 (LG6) and BS5489 Part 1.

Confirmation that the lighting design of pedestrian pathways is / will be in compliance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6, 1992 (LG6) and BS5489 Part 1.

Req. 3

Commitment to consult with the Local Authority, service providers and relevant authorities in regards to the seating, sheltering and size of the shelter.

Confirmation that consultation with the Local Authority, service providers and relevant authorities has taken place with regards to the seating, sheltering and size of the shelter.

Req. 4

If transport nodes and shelters are not yet established for the development, a commitment to provide transport facilities in line with BREEAM requirements and to gain relevant consent should be made in the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement.

If transport nodes and shelters are not yet established for the development, a commitment to provide transport facilities in line with BREEAM requirements and to gain relevant consent should be made in the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement.

Second Credit

Req. 1 First Credit requirements have been addressed and achieved.

First Credit requirements have been addressed and achieved.

Req. 2

Written confirmation of the developer’s commitment to provide timetabling information that will be prominently displayed

Confirmation that timetabling information will be prominently displayed in the shelter and that seating capacity is adequate, from


Guidance



Public Transport


in the shelter and to ensure that seating capacity is adequate, from Local Authority and / or service provider.

Local Authority and / or service provider.

Third Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2

Marked up master plan highlighting the location of the shelter(s) in relation to key locations.

Site layout plans highlighting the location of the shelter(s) and detailed cross-sectional drawing providing details on the type of shelter to be provided.

Req. 3

Written commitment from the developer to the installation of CCTV systems as part of the provision of PT facilities.

Design details and specifications (where applicable) on the type of CCTV systems to be used as part of the PT facilities.

Req. 4 Commitment from the Local Authority and / or service provider to provide real time timetable information.

Details of system to be installed for the shelter.

Please Note: where the development is small in size compliance can be demonstrated by providing clearly marked plans with a marked safe route to the designated transport node / shelter.


The availability, comfort and safety of waiting areas for public transport are of utmost importance when it comes to encouraging people to use public transport. By making sure that these facilities are warm, well-lit and with sufficient seating for users to be out of the weather, it is likely that the numbers of public transport users will increase. Improving the security of bus stops and shelters by ensuring they are overlooked, and where applicable covered by CCTV, will further persuade members of the public to favour public transport over their cars.


Guidance



Public Transport


Glossary of terms

Section 106 Agreement: Section 106 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 allows a local planning authority (LPA) to enter into a legally-binding agreement or planning obligation, with a land developer over a related issue. S106 agreements can act as a main instrument for placing restrictions on the developers, often requiring them to minimise the impact on the local community and to carry out tasks, which will provide community benefits.

CCTV: Closed Circuit Television.

Shelter from the elements/out of the weather: Protection from precipitation and prevailing winds. Although this is location dependent, and will be judged by Local Authorities, it is generally accepted that this will comprise a roof, and walls on at least three sides.


Guidance



Public Transport




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 0.8

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.8


Guidance

Transport Mandatory Status Size Regions

TRA4 – Local Amenities No Regional SML ALL

General Policy


Aim

To reduce the need or requirement to travel by car to essential facilities by having them within a reasonable walking distance:

• Which of the items listed in the Compliance Requirements will be available within the stated distance of ALL dwellings within the proposed development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that items A and B from the list of essential facilities will be available within the stated distances.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that items A, B and C from the list of essential facilities will be available within the stated distances.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that items A, B and C PLUS any 5 (five) of the remaining items from the list of facilities will be available within the stated distances.



Combinations from the following list as detailed below:

a) Shop selling food and fresh groceries (500m)

b) Children’s playground / amenity area (500m)

c) Post box (500m)

d) Postal facility (1000m)

e) Bank or cash machine (1000m)

f) Pharmacy (1000m)


Guidance



General Policy


g) Primary school (1000m)

h) Medical centre (1000m)

i) Leisure facilities (1000m)

j) Local meeting place/community centre (1000m)

k) Public house (1000m)

l) Public park or public access space or village green (1000m)

m) Children's facilities (nursery/crèche) (1000m)

n) Places of religious worship (incl. Parish halls) (1000m)

Please Note: the above list is not in any priority order. Items D – N may be selected by the developer as they see fit.


1. Items A and B from the above list are within 500m of each dwelling on the development.

2. The facilities are located on safe, walkable pedestrian routes, focused around public transport nodes, for easier access to amenities.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Items A, B and C from the above list are located within 500m of each dwelling on the development.

2. The facilities are located on key pedestrian routes, focused around public transport nodes.


1. The first and second credits must be achieved.

2. Items A, B and C are located within 500m of each dwelling on the development, plus any 5 (five) remaining items on the above list, within the stated distance.


Guidance



General Policy


3. The facilities are located on key pedestrian routes, focused around public transport nodes.

Compliance Notes

1. Distance should not be measured 'as the crow flies' and must be measured via a safe pedestrian route (please refer to Compliance Note 7) from the main building entrance to the nearest public transport node that complies with the criteria.

2. A safe pedestrian route must have the following characteristics:

a) Lighting design of pedestrian pathways must be in compliance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6, 1992 (LG6) and BS5489 Part 1.

b) Where dedicated pedestrian crossing of a vehicle access route is provided, the road must be raised to pavement level (i.e. the pavement is not lowered to road level.)

c) For larger developments with a high number of public users / visitors, pedestrian pathways must be signposted to public transport nodes.

d) The carriageway of low-traffic roads with a speed limit of 20mph or below.

e) A footpath of >900mm.

3. In the case of rural developments only the following must be adhered to:

a) A grass verge can be accepted, but must be reasonably level, is at least 900m in unobstructed width and is continuous.

b) Roads without a speed limit of 20mph must have traffic calming measures in place and the road must be well lit.

c) In roads with a speed limit of 50mph, the road must be well lit, the pedestrian route must be contained within the length of the road, without sharp bends or significant junctions, and with a clear line of sight for at least 300m in either direction from the crossing point.

4. When any pedestrian routes cross a vehicular road with a speed limit of more than 20mph (except in a rural area) a safe crossing point must be provided.

5. Distances should be from building entrances to the facilities.

6. Amenities within the buildings will also meet the credit requirements.


Guidance



General Policy


7. A children’s playground must be clearly defined as such, designated as publicly available and maintained by the Local Authority or another body.

8. Leisure facilities must be open for public use, members only would not comply, although an entry fee is acceptable.

9. Public Access Space includes parks and open green communal spaces, village greens, coastal areas, AONB and woodlands.

10. In the case of a large development where amenities are to be provided as a part of the overall development, but built at a later stage than the building being assessed, the following should apply:

• A commitment to provide amenities should be made in the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement.

• EITHER, the amenities must be available for use by the time 25% of the assessed development has been completed and is ready for occupation

• OR, the amenities should be available for use within 25% of the total build time of the part of the overall development that is within the required distance of the amenities required under these credits. Use the most appropriate rule for the development in question, ensuring that the time building users have to wait before having use of the amenities is as short as possible. If there is any doubt regarding this issue, please contact BRE.

11. In the case of flats the distance requirement is based on the distance from the entrance to the block of flats.


Guidance



General Policy




First Credit

Req. 1

Master Plans of the site and the surrounding areas demonstrating the following:

• Location of proposed (or existing) essential facilities.

• If the facilities do not already exist, a timescale as to when they will be provided.

Site layout plans and design drawings of the site and surrounding areas demonstrating the following:

• Clearly marking the location of the essential facilities being assessed.

• If the facilities do not already exist, a timescale is required as to when they will be available.

Req. 2

Master plan of the proposed development demonstrating proposed pedestrian routes to the facilities clearly marked.

Marked up Plans showing safe pedestrian routes to the facilities, with a scale and preferably the trading name of the facility.

Second Credit

Req. 1







Req. 2




Guidance



General Policy


Third Credit

Req. 1







Req. 2




The reduction of short car journeys has a twofold effect; not only is the impact on the environment lessened, but it gives those without a car access to facilities and job opportunities. Research shows that the majority of car journeys are less than 5 miles, so by providing essential facilities close by and on safe pedestrian routes, an overall reduction in car journeys is likely.

Glossary of Terms

AONB: Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty.


Guidance



General Policy




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 0.8

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.8


Guidance


TRA5 – Network No National ML ALL

Cycling


Aim

To promote cycling as an alternative to the use of private cars for shorter journeys:

• Will there be a network of safe bike routes to local facilities near to and overlooked by roads and pavements?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that the infrastructure of the development is adapted to support cycle lanes and signage.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that safe, dedicated segregated cycle lanes have been built and serve key facilities.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that the development will have a safe, site wide segregated network with direct links to neighbouring routes.




1. Provision has been made for the infrastructure of the site to be adapted to accommodate cycle lanes.

2. Appropriate and adequate signage is provided detailing route information, as decided through consultation with Local Authority.

3. The routes must be designed to be safe and overlooked, as defined in the Compliance notes and Schedule of evidence required sections.


Guidance



Cycling


Two Credits (Good);

1. Dedicated, segregated cycle lanes are designed and built in accordance with the guidance in the National Cycle Network “Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2”, Sustrans and the relevant parts of Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist.

2. Key facilities surrounding the site are served by designated cycle routes.

3. The cycle lanes must be designed to be safe and overlooked, as defined in the Compliance notes and Schedule of Evidence.


1. A site-wide cycle network is in operation throughout the whole site, providing direct links with neighbouring routes, without fragmentation i.e. all facilities on the development must be served by designated cycle routes.

2. The network must be designed to be safe and overlooked, as defined in the Compliance notes and Schedule of evidence.

3. The route must have prominent signage displaying route information.


Guidance



Cycling


Compliance Notes

1. Where it is not possible to provide a non-fragmented route to neighbouring routes to provide a site wide cycle network, the diversion must be on roads with dedicated, segregated cycle lanes.

2. The key facilities served need to be in line with those outlined in TRA 4, Essential Facilities, though compliance with TRA 4 is not mandatory for this issue.

3. A safe route is deemed to be one that is overlooked by roads and pavements that comply with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6 1992 (LG6) and BS5489 Part 1.

4. Guidance must be sought from the Local Authority on the appropriate levels of signage regarding route information, and all signage must be approved by and in accordance with Local Authority standards.

5. The cycle lanes and pedestrian paths meet the following minimum width dimensions:

a) Where the cycle lane is segregated from at least the carriageway and preferably the pedestrian route. The minimum width of the cycle path is 2.0m and the minimum width of the pedestrian path is 1.5m.

b) Where the cycle route forms a part of the carriageway, the minimum width of the lane is 1.5m.

c) Minimum widths should not be regarded as the design target, where possible best practice as detailed in the Sustrans and DfT guidance must be aimed for.


Guidance



Cycling




First Credit

Req. 1

Copy of the masterplan demonstrating the site and surrounding areas, outlining the location of cycle lanes.

If the facilities do not already exist, a timescale is required as to when they will be available.

Scaled plans / design drawings of the site and surrounding areas, clearly marking the location of cycle lanes and signage, and the overlooking roads and pavements.


If cycle paths are not yet established for the development, a commitment to provide transport facilities in line with BREEAM requirements and to gain relevant consent should be made in the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement.

Req. 2

Confirmation that the signage is in compliance with Local Authority Standards.

Second Credit


Req. 2

In addition the master plan should highlight how the lanes will be separate and dedicated, and their location in relation to key facilities.

In addition the detailed site layout plans should highlight how the lanes will be separate and dedicated, and their location in relation to key facilities.

Req. 3

Commitment from the developer on the type of dedicated cycle lanes to be implemented.

Confirmation from the developer of the type of dedicated cycle lanes to be implemented, with details and dimensions, as well as a signed and dated copy of the NCN Design and


Guidance



Cycling


Construction Checklist from the design/project team (or completed by the assessor using design information).

Req. 4

Commitment from the developer to ensure that the cycle route will be designed in accordance with the best practice guidance.

A copy of the specification or scaled proposed site plan confirming that the cycle routes have been or will be designed in accordance with the best practice guidance.

Third Credit

Req. 1

The first and second credits have been achieved.


Req. 2

As for first and second credit, highlighting the route of the network and its links to neighbouring routes. Where the route is interrupted, the plan / drawing must be marked to how the dedicated lanes.

As for first and second credit, highlighting the route of the network and its links to neighbouring routes. Where the route is interrupted, the plan / drawing must be marked to show the dedicated lanes.


The implementation of segregated cycle lanes and networks is one of the most effective ways of reducing car dependency and the number of short car journeys. Linking these lanes and networks to neighbouring routes and ensuring that essential local facilities are served by the routes make it as convenient for occupants to cycle as it is to drive.


Guidance



Cycling




SE 1.0

SW N/A

EoE 0.8

WM N/A

EM 0.9

NW 0.9

NE 0.8

LON 0.8

Y&H 0.8


Guidance



Cycling


Aim

To promote cycling as an alternative to the use of private cars for shorter journeys, and reducing the fear of crime, by providing secure bicycle facilities at local facilities and transport nodes:

• What provision will be made for secure bicycle facilities (including storage, lockers and showers) at local facilities and transport nodes?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that studies have been carried out to determine likely facility requirements.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that studies have been carried out to determine the likely facility requirements and conclusions have been incorporated into the plans.

3 (Best)

The Second Credit has been met.

AND

In addition ring fenced funds appropriate to the project should be available for facility adjustments according to actual use once development is completed.




1. A study has been carried out to determine the likely facility requirements. As a minimum the study must examine:

a) Current facilities.

b) Current local environment.


Guidance



Cycling


c) Number of occupants and building users.

Two Credits (Good);

1. A study has been carried out to determine the likely facility requirements and examines the same points as for the first credit and must demonstrate that cyclist facilities are provided at the following places, the requirement is that they are at least present in a, b, c and d:

a) Public spaces

b) Schools

c) Places of work

d) Transport nodes

e) Healthcare facilities

f) Sports centres

g) Places of worship

h) Retail parks

2. The expected requirement for the provision of cycle storage of the development itself can be ascertained precisely from the Local Authority, however, the BREEAM requirements are that compliant cycle spaces must be provided for percentage numbers of the building users, as per the table below:

Non residential buildings with up to 500 users 10%

Non residential buildings with 501 – 1000 users 7%

Non residential buildings with 1001 + users 5%

Residential buildings 50%

E.g. for a building with 1500 users the requirement would be as follows:

• First 500 users: 50 cycle spaces

• Users 501-1000: 37.43 cycle spaces


Guidance



Cycling


• Users 1001 – 1500: 24.95 cycle spaces

• Total required: 112 spaces

3. At least two of the following compliant facilities must be provided for the building users.

a. Compliant showers

b. Compliant changing facilities and lockers for clothes.

c. Compliant drying space for wet clothes.

4. Across the entire development, the number of compliant spaces and compliant facilities must be worked out for each building and the total is then area weighted and averaged, based on whether the buildings are residential or non residential.

Please Note: where the building type is unknown default calculations must be made and evidence that the provision will support cycling must be provided.


a) The first and second credits are achieved; in addition, cyclist facilities must be present at all of the listed facilities.

b) Ring fenced funds must be allocated for the maintenance and adjustment of the facilities once the development is in use.


Guidance



Cycling


Compliance Notes

1. Compliant cycle storage facilities are those that meet the following:

a) The space is covered overhead and protected from the rain.

b) The covered area and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to a permanent structure (building or hard standing) and allow both the wheel and frame to be locked securely (e.g. Sheffield type). Or racks are located in a locked structure fixed to or part of a permanent structure with CCTV surveillance.

c) There is a minimum distance of 1.0m between cycle racks, where the racks allow for two-sided parking, and 0.8m for one-sided parking to enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed.

d) Racks positioned in a circular array are spaced in accordance with the guidance in the New Metric Handbook.

e) There is a minimum distance from any obstruction e.g. wall (located either to the side of the stand or in front of it) of 300mm for single-sided use and 900mm for double-sided use.

f) Adequate lighting is provided in accordance with BS5489 Part 1 – Lighting of roads and amenity areas.

g) The facilities are in a prominent site location that is viewable from the building.

h) The majority of the cycle racks are within 100m of a building entrance (ideally within 50m).

2. Vertical racks, which allow direct access (without the need to get alongside the locked bike) and permit one bike per vertical stack can comply with the requirements (provided all other requirements are met). For this type of rack, the distance between each rack can be less than 1.0m but not less than 600mm (the typical width of a bike across the handlebars).

3. One shower must be provided for every 10 cycle storage spaces and both male and female users catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific facilities or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use. The showers can be available for others to use in addition to cyclists.

4. Changing facilities and locker requirements;

a) For each shower provided, there is a minimum of 1m2 of changing space adjacent to the shower(s) with hooks for hanging clothes.


Guidance



Cycling


b) The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces provided.

c) Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms. Where the changing space is a cubicle the locker(s) must not be located within the cubicle.

d) Each locker is at least 400mm high by 200mm wide by 400mm deep.

e) Both male and female users are catered for i.e. either gender specific, shared facilities or single changing cubicles in mixed use areas.

f) Toilet/shower cubicles do not count as changing facilities.

5. The drying space (for wet clothes) must be a specially designed and designated space with adequate heating/ventilation. A plant room is not a compliant drying space.

6. Where the term building users is referenced, this refers to the staff who will work within the building.

7. Sites in city centre locations can reduce by 50% the requirements for compliant cycle spaces where at least two of the available BREEAM credits for frequency of public transport (Tra 2) have been awarded.

8. Sites in rural locations can reduce by 50% the requirements for compliant cycle spaces where the average building user commuting distances are likely to be greater than 10 miles. A rural location is one where the site is on land clearly not within or on an urban boundary; this includes village locations and green field sites.

9. These types of cycle storage devices do not comply with BREEAM:

1. Two-tier stands (i.e. where the bike is lifted and stored above another bike).

2. Hooks and wall attachments.

3. Single wheel (butterfly) bike rack holders (these racks provide less security and can cause damage to bike wheels).


Guidance



Cycling




First Credit

Req. 1

Outline of the key areas in the proposed feasibility study undertaken signed by the developer and / or design team.

Summary of the feasibility study undertaken signed by the developer and / or design team.

Second Credit


Req. 2

Copy of the master plan and letter of commitment from the developer addressing the following:

• The location of the cycle storage facilities.

• The number of cycle spaces provided.

• Building occupancy or, where relevant, net lettable / floor area

• Whether the building is in a city centre location.

Site plan, design drawings and/or a copy of the specification confirming:

• The location of the cycle storage facilities.

• The number of cycle spaces provided

• The type, dimensions and layout of cycle racks.

• The materials and construction specified for the facility

• The lighting for the facility is in accordance with BS5489 Part 1

• Building occupancy or, where relevant, net lettable / floor area

• Whether the building is in a city centre location.

Req. 3

Marked up plan of the surrounding areas, marking the key facilities with cycle facilities present.

Marked up plan of the surrounding areas, marking the key facilities with cycle facilities present.


Guidance



Cycling


Req. 4

Design drawings or a copy of the specification confirming:

• Number of showers.

• Changing room.

• Secure locker locations, dimensions and numbers.

• Drying space.

Third Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2

Commitment from the developer to provide specific funds for facility adjustments.

Confirmation from the developer and from the Local Authority that ring fenced funds will be available for facility adjustments.

Glossary of Terms

Ring fenced funds: Protected funds that are set aside for the project and cannot be spent on anything else.


Guidance



Cycling




SE 0.8

SW 1.0

EoE 0.8

WM 0.9

EM N/A

NW 1.0

NE 0.9

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.8


Guidance


TRA7 – Car Clubs No Regional SML ALL

Traffic


Aim

To reduce local residents’ dependency on the use and ownership of privately owned cars:

• What steps will the developer take to reduce residents’ dependency on cars through support or establishment of a car club?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that feasibility studies have been carried out to establish whether the new development makes it possible for the new and surrounding community to establish a viable car club.

2 (Good)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that a car club has been established with appropriate facilities (dedicated parking spaces, garaging) provided within the new development

OR

Where support is provided to an existing car club (through funding or additional facilities, etc).

3 (Best)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that feasibility studies have been carried out to establish whether the new development makes it possible for the new and surrounding community to establish a viable car club.

AND

Where a car club has been established with a management plan and identified and allocated funding to financially support the club over the first 3 years of the development.


Guidance



Traffic




1. A feasibility study has been carried out and as a minimum has examined:

a) Occupancy of the development

b) Costs involved

c) Existing facilities within the community

d) Possibility of funding

e) Existing car clubs.

Two Credits (Good);

1. A car club has been established for use in the community.

OR

Support is provided through additional facilities and a commuted sum to an existing car club in the community.

2. The car club must have appropriate and adequate facilities, as detailed in the Compliance notes.

3. Targets set for increasing use of car club on an annual basis.



2. The car club must have a management plan and identified, allocated funding to financially support the club for the first three years.

3. The funding for this would be set at a minimum of £3000 (or an appropriate amount as defined by the feasibility study, £3000 being the minimum allowed).

4. The three years is from the practical completion of enough units to make the car club viable (as identified through the feasibility study).


Guidance



Traffic


Compliance Notes

Car Clubs 1. Compliant car clubs may take the form of a pool of cars for community use, or a rental system such as www.flexicar.com. For commercial buildings, lift sharing clubs may also comply, provided it can be proved that their use is widespread and incentives are provided.

2. For commercial buildings, dedicated car parking spaces must be provided for all car sharers.

3. For residential use, the car club must have a dedicated garage, with transport links to and from the garage.

4. For both residential and commercial buildings the car club must be integrated with the public transport network and the garage must comply with the regional minimum standard set out in TRA 1 for distances to transport nodes.

Management Plan The management plan and funding must be based on the findings of the feasibility study.

http://www.flexicar.com


Guidance



Traffic




First Credit

Req. 1

Outline of the key areas that a feasibility study will address.

Summary of the feasibility study undertaken signed by the developer and / or design team.

Second Credit


Req. 2

Details of the car club to be established along with targets for increasing use and the facilities for the club.

OR

Details of the alternative arrangement to be used.

Confirmation from the developer and the relevant third party that a car club has been established for the community.

OR

Confirmation from the developer and the third party that support is being provided to an existing car club, in the form of a formal contract detailing the type of support and the duration of said support.

Req. 3

Design drawings and plan highlighting the dedicated car club facilities, along with statistics of the proportion of facilities to users.

Marked up plan of the surrounding area, showing the distances from the car club facilities to transport nodes, to demonstrate compliance with regional standards set out in TRA1.

If the car club is not yet established for the development, a commitment to provide a car club in line with BREEAM


Guidance



Traffic


Req. 4 requirements and to gain relevant consent should be made in the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement.

Third Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2

Contract with relevant organisation(s) outlining commitment to manage the car company and provide funding for the first three years. If these responsibilities lie with different organisations, all relevant contracts must be provided.

Req. 3 Reference must be made in the feasibility study as to when the Car Club becomes feasible / viable.


Relevant information can be sought from Department for Transport: Good Practice Guide – making car sharing and car clubs work (2004).


Guidance



Traffic




SE 0.7

SW N/A

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW N/A

NE 0.9

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance


TRA8 – Flexible Parking No Regional SML ALL

Traffic


Aim

To ensure that the development provides flexible spaces that can accommodate other uses outside the areas of peak parking demand:

• What percentage of car parks will be designed to be for flexible use when not being used for parking?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 5 - 10% of car parks will be designed to be for flexible use.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 10 - 20% of car parks will be designed to be for flexible use.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that >20% of car parks will be designed to be for flexible use.




1. Consultation has taken place with potential users of the space, to ascertain requirements and frequency.

2. 5 - 10% of the development’s car parking space must be assigned to other uses outside of peak parking demand such as play space and market space.


Guidance



Traffic


Two Credits (Good);


2. 10 - 20% of the development’s car parking space must be assigned to other uses outside of peak parking demand such as play space and market space.



2. >20% of the development’s car parking space must be assigned to other uses outside of peak parking demand such as play space and market space.

Compliance Notes

Flexible Parking Flexible car parking should consist of parking spaces that have a range of various functions at different periods through the day and during the week.

• For example on week days parking spaces around a busy commercial office and shopping precinct could be used to accommodate a local market stalls on the weekend.

Consultation with Potential Users

Consultation should take place with local representatives who would be able to utilise flexible parking space outside of peak times. Their views should be sought as to whether this would be feasible.


Guidance



Traffic




First Credit

Req. 1

Copy of the masterplan demonstrating the site and surrounding areas, highlighting the proposed parking areas and those that can be used for flexible space.


Marked up plan highlighting the car parking areas which can be used for flexible space and the other car parking space.

Details and results from consultation process ascertaining requirements and frequency, this can be in the form of minutes or in a report.

Commitment from the developer in the form of either a formal letter, or an extract from the relevant section in the design specification requiring that 5 -10% of the area can be used for flexible space.

Second Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit. The first credit is achieved.

Req. 2

Commitment from the developer in the form of either a formal letter, or an extract from the relevant section in the design specification requiring that 10 -20% of the area can be used for flexible space.

Third Credit

Req. 1 The first and second credits have been achieved.

The first and second credits are achieved.


Guidance



Traffic


Req. 2 Commitment from the developer in the form of either a formal letter, or an extract from the relevant section in the design specification requiring that >20% of the area can be used for flexible space.


Relevant information can be sought from CABE’s Urban Design Compendium – Section 4: Making the connections and the Department for Transport: Local Transport Notes (Traffic Management and Streetscape).


Guidance



Traffic




SE 0.7

SW 1.0

EoE N/A

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.8

LON 0.7

Y&H N/A


Guidance


TRA9 – Local Parking Yes National SML ALL

Traffic


Aim

To reduce levels of car parking available as an incentive to use public transport and other methods of mobility and communication:

• How will car parking standards compare with Local Authority requirements?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where evidence provided demonstrates that car parking standards will be between Local Authority minimum and maximum standards as referenced in the Local Plan.

2 (Good)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that car parking standards are the Local Authority maximum standards as referenced in the Local Plan.

AND

That parking restraint measures are in place.

3 (Best)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that the second credit has been achieved.

AND

That alternative transport is provided.

Please Note: maximum is defined as the absolute number of parking spaces allowed by the local authority.


Guidance



Traffic





1. Consultation has taken place between the developer and Local Authority to consider the following:

a) Size of the development.

b) Type of development.

c) Expected usage of the development’s facilities.

d) Public transport.

2. The results of the consultation have been analysed and an appropriate level of parking has been agreed, which falls between the Local Authority minimum and maximum standards.

OR

Where no local target exists then the national maximum will apply, as outlined in the Compliance Notes section of this issue.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The first credit is achieved and in addition, the Local Authority maximum applies.

2. Parking restraint measures are in place throughout the development, examples of which include, but are not limited to; limited on-site spaces and garaging, scheme for renting / purchasing car parking spaces and garages, and cycle spaces on streets.



2. The development must also have achieved the ‘Good’ standard in issue TRA1.


Guidance



Traffic


Compliance Notes

The national maximum is as follows:

Use National Maximum Parking Standard

(1 space / m2 of gross floorspace unless otherwise stated)

Threshold from & above which standard applies (gross floorspace)

Food retail 1 space per 14 m2 1000m2

Non-food retail 1 space per 20m2 1000m2

Cinemas & conference facilities

1 space per 5 seats 1000m2

Assembly & Leisure

1 space per 22m2 1000m2

Business (including offices)

1 space per 30m2 2500m2

Higher & further education

1 space per 2 staff + 1 space per 15 students

2500m2

Stadia 1 space per 15 seats 1500 seats

1. In exceptional circumstances where there are significant implications for road safety, which cannot be resolved through the introduction or enforcement of on-street parking controls, the levels of parking may be outside of the Local Authority standards. However, this must be fully documented and confirmed in writing by the Local Authority.

2. Through consultation with Local Authority, there must also be adequate provision for motorcycle parking.

3. There the Local Authority has car parking standards different to the above these will take precedent over BREEAM Communities. Where this is the case the assessor MUST provide evidence as to the source of these revised standards,


Guidance



Traffic


and agreement from the Local Authority that these standards should replace those contained within the Technical Guidance Manual.


Guidance



Traffic




First Credit

Req. 1 Copy of the masterplan demonstrating the site and surrounding areas, highlighting the proposed parking areas.

Signed and dated summary of the consultation between developer and Local Authority, agreeing the appropriate level of car parking for the development.

Req. 2 Identification by the developer of the local planning authority’s requirements for car parking provisions.

An extract from the relevant section in the design specification requiring that the appropriate level of car parking, as agreed with the Local Authority, will be implemented throughout the development.

Second Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit. The first credit has been achieved.

Req. 2

An extract from the relevant section in the design specification and / or a formal letter requiring / confirming that the appropriate level of car parking, in line with the Local Authority maximum, will be implemented throughout the development and that car parking restraint measures will be in place on site.

Third Credit



Req. 2 Evidence requirements from TRA1 demonstrating compliance.


Guidance



Traffic





Guidance



Traffic




SE 0.7

SW 1.0

EoE 0.9

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 0.5

NE 0.9

LON 1.0

Y&H 0.9


Guidance


TRA10 – Home Zones No Regional SML ALL

Traffic


Aim

To enable residents the ability to use and enjoy space around homes whilst maintaining vehicular access.

• Will the development have residential / mixed use streets (excluding primary and public transport routes) designed for pedestrian priority?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 50% of the residential streets on the development are Home Zones.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 65% of the residential streets on the development are Home Zones.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 80% of the residential streets on the development are Home Zones.




1. Consultation has taken place with the Local Authority to consider the feasibility of 50% of the residential streets on the development being Home Zones or equivalent, and where it is feasible, that appropriate levels of signage have also been agreed.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The first credit is achieved and, where feasible, 65% of the residential streets on the development are Home Zones or equivalent.


Guidance



Traffic


2. Within the development’s traffic management plan, targets have been set regarding road traffic accident reduction and that these targets have been agreed with the Local Authority and/or police authority.


1. The first credit and second credits are achieved and, where feasible, 80% of the residential streets on the development are Home Zones or equivalent.

Compliance Notes

Residential areas

Primary and secondary transport routes are exempt from the requirements and should be excluded from the calculation of streets for this Issue.

Assessment The percentage designation is referring to the percentage of the total street area i.e. m2, not total number of streets / distance.

Dedicated centralised parking provision shall not be considered when calculating the provision of street parking or the proportion of this that is Home Zones (or equivalent).

Similar scheme

Other schemes, similar to Home Zones may be compliant. Application of local or national schemes for consideration as equivalence should be made through the usual Checklist A10 process. Please contact BRE with details if you wish to have another scheme considered ([email protected]).

Home Zones Guidance on Home Zones can be found at www.homezones.org


http://www.homezones.org


Guidance



Traffic




First Credit

Req. 1

Commitment, in the form of a letter or email, from the developer to addressing the requirements of the ‘Home Zone’ concept.

Signed and dated details of the consultation with the Local Authority, agreed levels of signage and confirmation of percentage of residential streets complying.

Second Credit

Req. 1

The first credit is achieved, with details on the developer’s commitment to achieve the additional 15%.

The first credit is achieved, with confirmation of the additional 15%.

Req. 2

Signed and dated correspondence from the Local Authority and / or Police authority detailing targets for road traffic accident reduction targets and copy of the development’s traffic management plan, highlighting the targets.

Third Credit

Req. 1

The first credit and second credit are addressed, with details on the developer’s commitment to achieve the additional 15%.

The first and second credits are achieved, with confirmation of the additional 15%.

Req. 2

Evidence of compliance with Best Standard for TRA4.

Please Note: the Home Zone should be assessed by AREA and not by DISTANCE within the development.


Guidance



Traffic





Guidance



Traffic




SE 0.5

SW 1.0

EoE 0.6

WM 0.6

EM 0.6

NW 1.0

NE 0.6

LON 0.5

Y&H 0.6


Guidance


TRA11 – Transport Assessment Yes National SML ALL

Traffic


Aim

To manage the impact of the development upon the existing transport infrastructure and the community.

• Has a Transport Assessment been carried out in line with Department for Transport guidance?

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where evidence provided demonstrates that a transport impact assessment has been carried out and is available for the Local Authority to view.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that impacts identified in the transport assessment are acceptable given the benefits of the development.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that mitigation of impacts planned into design through the provision of infrastructure, amenity or services will be of community benefit.




1. Evidence provided shows that a transport impact assessment has been undertaken and that this has been provided to the local authority.

2. The Transport Impact Assessment must be carried out in line with the guidance on the Department for Transport website and must be approved and agreed by the design team and available for the Local Authority to view.


Guidance



Traffic


Two Credits (Good);

1. The first credit is achieved.

2. A report has been produced demonstrating that the benefits created by the development are outweigh the drawbacks of the development to the local community (in relation to transport).



2. A report has been produced detailing the provision of infrastructure, amenity or services that will be of community benefit.

Compliance Notes

Transport Assessment

Guidance on the completion of a Transport Assessment can be found on the DfT website: www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/regional/transportassessments/guidanceonta

http://www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/regional/transportassessments/guidance


Guidance



Traffic




First Credit

Req. 1

A copy of the transport impact assessment.

Copy of the Transport Impact Assessment, signed and dated by the design team.

Req. 2 Copy of confirmation of receipt of the transport impact assessment from the local authority.

Second Credit

Req. 1 As for first credit. The first credit is achieved.

Req. 2 A commitment from the developer to produce a report balancing the impacts and the benefits of the development.

Copy of the report balancing the impacts and the benefits of the development, signed and dated by the design team.

Third Credit



Req. 2

A commitment from the developer to produce a further report detailing the infrastructure, amenities and / or services which will feature on the development and how these will be of community benefit.

Copy of the report detailing the infrastructure, amenities and / or services which will feature on the development and how these will be of community benefit, signed and dated by the design team.


Guidance



Traffic


Req. 3 Section 106 Agreement or other legally binding commitment confirming the amenities / services which will be in place on site.




Guidance



Traffic




SE N/A

SW N/A

EoE N/A

WM N/A

EM N/A

NW 1.0

NE 0.9

LON 1.0

Y&H N/A


Guidance

Transport Mandatory Status Size Type TRA12 – Electric Vehicle

Charging Points No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Low Carbon Transport


Aim

To promote the integration of electric vehicle charging points in new developments.

• To what extent have electric vehicle charging points been incorporated within the development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) A feasibility study has been conducted to explore the viability of installing electric vehicle charging points on the new development.

2 (Good)


PLUS

Electric vehicle charging points are installed inline with Local Authority Guidance at residential locations.

3 (Best)


PLUS

Electric vehicle charging points are installed at office and commercial locations within the site.




• A feasibility study is conducted for the development site that explicitly explores the viability of electric vehicle charging points.

• The feasibility study makes clear recommendations as to the location that these points should be installed.


Guidance





Two Credits (Good);


AND

2. In line with the findings of the feasibility study electric vehicle charging points have been installed at residential locations.



AND

2. In line with the findings of the feasibility study electric vehicle charging points have been installed at office locations and in the public realm. This will include charging points at transport nodes and at commercial premises with public access.


Guidance





Compliance Notes

Vehicle charging points

Electric vehicle charging points are an increasing focus for the Government:

www.planningportal.gov.uk/general/news/stories/2011/jan2011/21jan2011/210111_3

Commercial charging points

Where retailers commit to installing electric vehicle charging points these can be used to contribute to the Best benchmark where commitments are in place to make these available for customers.

Residential vehicle charging points

Residential charging point should reflect Department for Transport guidance on ‘Plugged in Places’: www.dft.gov.uk/adobepdf/163944/ulcc.pdf

http://www.planningportal.gov.uk/general/news/stories/2011/jan201

http://www.dft.gov.uk/adobepdf/163944/ulcc.pdf


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

• Copy of a feasibility study undertaken for the development site OR local area exploring the potential to include electric vehicle charging points within the development.

• Copy of a feasibility study undertaken for the development site OR local area exploring the potential to include electric vehicle charging points within the development.

AND

• Marked up site plans showing proposed locations of electric vehicle charging points within the proposed development.

Second Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2

• The electric vehicle charging points are designed and installed inline with relevant Local Authority Guidance (or equivalent National Best Practice Guidance).

• Final drawings and / or examples of previous installations that the developer will use installed inline with Local Authority Guidance (or equivalent National Best Practice Guidance).

Third Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2

• Marked up site plans indicating electric vehicle charging points in relation to office / commercial

• Marked up site plans indicating electric vehicle charging points in relation to office / commercial


Guidance





premises. premises.

AND

• Confirmation from tenants / occupiers that these points will be available for use by staff / customers where applicable.




Guidance







SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance


TRA13 - Transport Impacts No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Road Design / Layout


Aim

To ensure vehicle speeds are appropriate to all road users:

• Credits are awarded where a traffic management plan will be in place which encourages the safe passage of vehicles through the development at an appropriate speed and without rat runs.

Please Note: This could include passive design measures (e.g. Road narrowing, surface treatments, etc).

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) See relevant local planning authority standard for minimum requirements.

2 (Good) Design strategies have been developed for major routes to reduce road traffic to a speed deemed suitable for the route.

3 (Best) Design strategies have been developed for the entire site to reduce road traffic to a speed deemed suitable.




• Developers / designers should refer to Local Authority ‘Local Transport Plan’ for design speeds / requirements of the Local Authority.

• Where new roads are being delivered as part of the scheme these should be designed in line with Department for Transport guidance on road safety and speed management.


Guidance





Two Credits (Good);


AND

2. Confirmation is provided from the developer that ALL major roads within the development have been designed to meet the Local Authority Guidance.



AND

2. Confirmation is provided from the developer that ALL roads within the development have been designed to meet the Local Authority Guidance.


Guidance





Compliance Notes

DfT guidance Designers and developers should follow Local Authority Design Guidance on the suitable design of roads relevant to the local context.

Where the LPA have not issued guidance developers should follow industry recognised best practice guidance. This should include the Department for Transport guidance on speed management: www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/roadsafety/speedmanagement/

Further Guidance, such as Manual for Streets (www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/sustainable/manforstreets/?view=Standard) and Local Authority Guidance (www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/roadsafety/laguidance/?view=Standard) should be sought.

Speed Limits Developers should refer to DfT Circular 01/2006 in setting speed limits where these are different to national speed limits: www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/roadsafety/speedmanagement/dftcircular106/dftcircular106.pdf

Major Routes Major roads (routes) are classed as arterial roads with a speed limit more than 30mph, including District / Local Distributers.

http://www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/roadsafety/speedmanagement/

http://www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/sustainable/manforstreets/?view=Standa

http://www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/roadsafety/laguidance/?view=Standard

http://www.dft.gov.uk/pgr/roadsafety/speedmanagement/dftcircular


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

• Roads / site plans are confirmed to have been designed inline with relevant local authority guidance.

• Roads / site plans are confirmed to have been designed inline with relevant local authority guidance. Confirmation from the relevant LPA Officer that local guidance has been followed.

Second Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2

• Transport strategy / road design that demonstrates the ALL major roads have been designed to comply with local OR national standards.

• Confirmation that ALL major routes within the development meet local OR national standards.

Third Credit

Req. 1

• The Second Credit has been achieved.

• The Second Credit has been achieved.

Req. 2

• Transport strategy / road design that demonstrates the ALL roads have been designed to comply with local OR national standards.

• Confirmation that ALL roads within the development meet local OR national standards.

Please Note: where there are NO major roads within the development the Third Credit can be achieved if the roads are designed inline with local guidance.


Guidance








Guidance







SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance


TRA14 - Commercial LGV Plan No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Vehicular Access


Aim

To reduce the impact of heavy goods vehicles loading on public highways:

• Will provision be made for off-road LGV / delivery loading space for retail, commercial and industrial units?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Yes for 60 - 80% of units requiring LGV servicing.

2 (Good) Yes, for > 80% of cases.

3 (Best) Yes, for 100% of cases.




• Between 60% and 80% of retail, commercial and industrial units have designated delivery areas OR areas that receive deliveries will not disrupt traffic on public highways.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Between 80% and 99% of retail, commercial and industrial units have designated delivery areas OR areas that receive deliveries will not disrupt traffic on public highways.


1. ALL (100%) of retail, commercial and industrial units have designated delivery areas OR are areas that receive deliveries will not disrupt traffic on public highways.


Guidance



Vehicular Access


Compliance Notes

LGV (Large Goods Vehicle)

Large Goods Vehicle, formerly Heavy Goods Vehicle.

Service Yards Where offices / retail premises share service areas compliance can be demonstrated where vehicular access is possible from main roads.

Plot level requirements

Where the building type is unknown BUT the land / plot use is known the developer can demonstrate compliance with this credit where it can be demonstrated that delivery areas are away from public roads AND that these are capable of accommodating LGV’s.


Guidance



Vehicular Access




First Credit

Req. 1

• Marked up site plans demonstrating that between 60% and 80% of retail, commercial and industrial units or the plots on which they will be sited have designated delivery areas OR have areas that receive deliveries that will not disrupt traffic on public highways.


Req. 2

• Marked up drawings showing HGV turning circles in relation to delivery areas away from public highways.

• Where applicable confirmation from building occupiers that deliveries will not disrupt vehicle movement on public highways.

Second Credit

Req. 1

• Marked up site plans demonstrating that between 80% and 99% of retail, commercial and industrial units or the plots on which they will be sited have designated delivery areas OR have areas that receive deliveries that will not disrupt traffic on public highways.


Req. 2



Third Credit

Req. 1

• Marked up site plans demonstrating that 100% of retail, commercial and industrial units or the plots on which



Guidance



Vehicular Access


they will be sited have designated delivery areas OR have areas that receive deliveries that will not disrupt traffic on public highways.

Req. 2



Please Note: where turning circles are required / anticipated these should be indicated in site plans / drawings to demonstrate that vehicle turning does not disrupt other users of the development.




Guidance



Vehicular Access




SE 0.5

SW N/A

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW N/A

NE N/A

LON 0.5

Y&H 0.7


Community


Guidance

Community Mandatory Status Size Type

COM1 – Inclusive Design Yes Regional SML ALL



Aim

To create an inclusive community by encouraging the construction of buildings that are accessible and easily adaptable to meet the changing needs of current and future occupants:

• Will the development be designed for improved accessibility for mobility impaired occupants?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum- Mandatory)

An inclusive Design Strategy is produced from the outset of the development.

2 (Good)


AND

The inclusive Design Strategy directly adheres to the Homes and Communities Agency (former English Partnerships), or equivalent, guidance note on Inclusive Design and follows the process outlined by the Inclusive Design Checklist flowchart in the document

3 (Best)

The first and second credit has been achieved.

AND

All principles of Lifetime Homes and the Wheelchair Housing Design Guide, applicable to all dwellings in the development, have been complied with PLUS Local Authority Guidance on Inclusive Community Design has been sought.


Guidance








1. Provided a copy of the inclusive Design Strategy.

Two Credits (Good);

1. Provided a copy of the inclusive Design Strategy following the basic principles set out by the Homes and Communities Agency (former English Partnerships) guidance on Inclusive Design.


1. First and second credit achieved.

2. The Lifetime Homes standard followed by completing the Lifetime Homes standard checklist indicating compliance with all applicable points from 1 –1 6 for all dwellings in the development, signed by the developer.

3. The Wheelchair Housing Design Guide 2nd Edition (WHDG) (2006) checklist has been used. Compliance has been achieved on all 14 features listed in the WHDG checklist for all dwellings in the development, signed by the developer.

4. Where relevant guidance from the Local Authority on accessible communities has been followed (i.e. for elderly / partially sighted residents).


Guidance





Compliance Notes

Alternative Inclusive Design Guidance

There are several design guidance strategies available from various sources. The most notable being RIBA and the Homes and Communities Agency (former English Partnership) guidance.

If there are alternatives please contact BRE for further information.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

Documentation that confirms that a Design Strategy will be completed.

Evidence should include:

• Letter of confirmation from the client to the design team

• Plan of how the Design Strategy will be implemented.

A Copy of the Design Strategy with details outlining how it was produced.

Evidence should include a copy of the final Design Strategy.

Second Credit

Req. 1

• Documentation that confirms that a Design Strategy will be completed.

• Homes and Communities Agency (former English Partnership’s) Inclusive Design Guidance requirements have been followed.




A copy of the Design Strategy with details outlining how it addressed the Homes and Communities Agency (former English Partnerships) Inclusive Design Guidance requirements (or equivalent).



Guidance





Third Credit

Req. 1

• Documentation that confirms that a Design Strategy will be completed.

• A commitment that the Homes and Communities Agency (former English Partnership’s) Inclusive Design Guidance requirements will be followed.

• For domestic buildings the Lifetime Homes Checklist and Wheelchair Housing Design Guide checklist will be completed.




A copy of the Design Strategy with details outlining how it addressed the Homes and Communities Agency (former English Partnerships) Inclusive Design Guidance requirements (or equivalent).


Note: For domestic buildings confirmation that the developer / designer has completed the Lifetime Homes and Wheelchair Housing Design Guide checklist (or equivalent) and that all the elements will be met, signed by the developer.

Req. 2 • Where relevant the developer has confirmed that the proposed development will be accessible to other groups i.e. for elderly / partially sighted residents.

• Where relevant the developer has confirmed that the proposed development is designed to allow access for other local groups i.e. for elderly / partially sighted residents.


Relevant definitions:

Disability: The Disability Discrimination Act (DDA) defines a disabled person as someone who has a physical or mental impairment that has a substantial and long-term adverse effect on his or her ability to carry out normal day-to-day activities. Physical or mental impairments can include visual, cognitive, mobility and hearing impairments.


Guidance





Lifetime Homes: Developed by Habinteg Housing Association, the Helen Hamlyn Foundation and the Joseph Rowntree Foundation in the early 1990’s. The scheme involves the incorporation of 16 design features that together create a flexible blueprint for accessible and adaptable housing in any setting.

Inclusive Design: a way of designing products and environments so that they are usable and appealing to everyone regardless of age, ability or circumstance by working with users to remove barriers in the social, technical, political and economic processes underpinning building and design.

Wheelchair accessible homes: homes built to the standards detailed in The Wheelchair Housing Design Guide, 2nd edition, 2006. They are different to Lifetime Homes, although they have some features in common. Wheelchair accessible homes allow either immediate occupation by a wheelchair user or easy adaptation when the need arises.


Guidance







SE N/A

SW N/A

EoE N/A

WM N/A

EM N/A

NW 1.0

NE 0.7

LON N/A

Y&H N/A


Guidance


COM2 – Consultation Yes National SML ALL



Aim

To promote community involvement in the design of the development to ensure their needs, ideas and knowledge are taken into account to improve the quality and acceptability of the development:

• What methods have been used to actively engage the local community in the development proposal?

a) Local community stakeholders have been told about the proposal (e.g. public notices and adverts) so that they can comment to the Planning Authority.

b) Local community stakeholders have been consulted for opinion on a pre-prepared scheme (e.g. leaflets and return forms).

c) Local community stakeholders have been asked to select their preferred option from a range of schemes and their preferred proposal has been put forward (e.g. through remote surveys or through a public meeting).

d) Local community stakeholders have been involved in the preparation of this proposal (e.g. through workshops or participative processes).

e) Local community stakeholders produced the guidelines for the development of this proposal (e.g. Village Design Statements, Place check, Charrettes).

Assessment Criteria

Credits


Where evidence provided demonstrates that consultation has been or is being undertaken and feedback given to the local community, building and development users.

2 (Good) Where in addition to the above, evidence provided demonstrates that changes to the design and / or action have been taken because of the above consultation process.

3 (Best) Where in addition to the above, evidence provided demonstrates that the consultation process involves facilitated workshops (involving the local community) and / or Charrettes.


Guidance








1. During the preparation of the brief the following was undertaken:

a) Members of the local community and appropriate stakeholders identified with whom the design team consulted.

b) Knowledge and experience collated from the previous developments of the same type (if relevant) to identify existing partnerships and networks. If the proposed development is new, for an existing community or for a community still under construction, a representative consultation group should be identified from similar developments of the same type in the same authority / area / region.

c) A consultation plan was prepared and included a timescale and methods of consultation, clearly identifying at which points consultees could usefully contribute and how they would be kept informed about progress on the project.

2. The consultation included at least the following issues:

a) Effects upon the surrounding community.

b) Functionality, quality and local impact.

c) Management and operational implications.

d) Maintenance resources / burdens.

e) Good and bad examples of developments of the same type.

f) Local traffic / transport impact.

g) Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the community.

3. Feedback has been given to the consultation group regarding suggestions made, and this feedback covered:

a) What was proposed during the consultation exercise.

b) How each of these proposals were considered.


Guidance





c) The outcome, e.g. implementation of suggestions or description of why options have not been deemed feasible.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The first credit has been achieved.

2. The project team demonstrate how the results of the consultation process have influenced, or resulted in modifications to the proposed design and development’s operation / use.


1. The first and second credits have been achieved.

2. The project team demonstrate the following:

a) The consultation process used an independent facilitator or methodology to engage with the local community and its key stakeholders.

b) Completion of a Charrette (consultation or immersion workshops) as part of the community involvement / consultation process


Guidance





Compliance Notes

Make it timely Participation should not be so late in the life of an issue that it is tokenistic, or merely confirms decisions already made. The timing should occur when citizens have the best chance of influencing outcomes. Give people enough time to express their views.

Make it inclusive

Participants should be selected in a way that is not open to manipulation, and should include a cross-section of the population,as individuals and as groups. These should include disabled people, men and women, elderly people, children, young people, pregnant mothers, parents of young children and ethnic minority groups. Random selection offers the best chance of achieving this.

Make it community-focussed

Ask participants not what they want personally or what is in their self-interest, but what they consider appropriate in their role as citizens.

Make it interactive & deliberative

Avoid reducing questions to a simplistic either/or response. Allow consideration of the big picture, so people can really become engaged.

Make it effective

Although decision-making can strive for consensus, complete agreement need not be the outcome. Be clear on how the decisions will be made so that participants know and understand the impact of their involvement. Make sure all participants have time to become well-informed about and to understand material they are unlikely to have a prior familiarity.

Make it matter

It is important that there is a strong likelihood that any recommendations which emerge from the consultative process will be adopted. If they are not, it is important that a public explanation is provided. Faith in the process is important by both the power holders and the participants.


Guidance





Make it well-facilitated

It is important that all participants control the agenda and content because this will give the process more credibility. An independent, skilled and flexible facilitator with no vested interest is essential in order to achieve this.

Make it open, fair and subject to evaluation

The consultation method should be appropriate to the target group. Evaluation questions should be formulated in advance. Decide how the ‘success’ of the consultation will be measured. Include factors beyond the adoption of recommendations..Feedback to the community after consultation is over is essential.

Make it cost effective

It is difficult to measure community satisfaction, or savings in costly litigation that could arise in the absence of consultation and participation. However, factors can be considered including how many and which types of community members should be consulted on a given issue. Some questions will require broader consultation, others more targeted consultation. Costs will vary and are adaptable, but the process selected must be properly resourced.

Make it flexible

A variety of consultation mechanisms exist. Choose the one which best suits the circumstances. Try a variety of mechanisms over time. Think how to reach all your users, including those with special needs (e.g. language, disabilities, the elderly, and the young). Different communities and different questions will produce better responses with different forms of consultation. Mix qualitative and quantitative research methods.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

A list of the stakeholders consulted.

Copies of agendas and minutes of meetings with the stakeholders demonstrating:

• The consultation plan in action

• The stage in plan of works that consultation occurred.

Req. 2 A consultation plan setting out the process and the scope of the consultation.

Copies of documentation demonstrating consultation feedback, including (where relevant):

• Newsletters, posters, circulars etc

• Agenda and minutes from meetings.

Evidence as outlined at the early master planning (outline) stage of assessment.

Second Credit

Req. 1









Guidance






Evidence as outlined at the early master planning (outline) stage of assessment.

Third Credit

Req. 1









• Evidence as outlined at the early master planning (outline) stage of assessment.

Req. 3 Evidence demonstrating the involvement of an independent (third party) facilitator or consultation method such as (but not limited to):

• Design Quality Indicators (DQI)

• Design Quality Method (DQM)

• Village Design Process


Guidance







Functionality: The way in which the development’s built environment is designed to be useful and is split into use, access and space.

Build quality: The engineering and construction performance of a development and its built environment.

Impact: The development’s ability to create a sense of place, and have a positive effect on the local community and environment. This includes character and innovation, form and materials, internal environment and urban and social integration.

Consultation guidance and methodologies

There is a great deal of guidance available on community consultation, and many specialist organisations offer such services. Much of it is focussed on community planning, but is adaptable. Examples of guidance and methodologies in the public domain include:

• The National Charrette Institute is a non-profit educational institution that helps communities achieve healthy transformations through collaborative planning processes that harness the talents and energies of all interested parties to create and support a buildable plan. www.charretteinstitute.org

• Planning for Real is a participative planning initiative. www.nifonline.org.uk

• For a guide to neighbourhood renewal and various resources see: www.renewal.net

• The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. www.dqi.org.uk

• The Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment has various publications to provide guidance on design, and a section on education on design for young people. www.cabe.org.uk

• Developed by BRE in 2002, the Design Quality Method (DQM) is used by UK auditing authorities (Audit Commission; NAO; NIAO: and Audit Scotland) to assess the design quality and value-for-money of educational and health buildings.

• National Register of Access Consultants is an independent register of accredited Access Auditors and Access Consultants who meet professional standards and criteria established by a peer review system. It is a UK-wide accreditation service

http://www.charretteinstitute.org

http://www.nifonline.org.uk

http://www.renewal.net

http://www.dqi.org.uk

http://www.cabe.org.uk


Guidance





for individuals who undertake access auditing and access consultancy. http://www.nrac.org.uk/Client_guide.html

• Disability Equality Duty ensures that all public bodies - such as central or local government, schools, health trusts or emergency services – pay ’due regard‘ to the promotion of equality for disabled people in every area of their work. Consultation and impact assessment methodology should be applied to the procurement of master planning and subsequent building design and management.

http://www.nrac.org.uk/Client_guide.html


Guidance







SE 0.9

SW 1.0

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 0.9

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


COM3 – Development User Guide No National ML ALL



Aim

To encourage and promote sustainable lifestyles and help with the integration into the local community:

• Will a pack be provided to each dwelling (or occupied unit) containing information on:

a) Local transport services

b) Utility suppliers

c) Energy efficiency - including measures incorporated into the development and / or dwelling

d) Local amenities

e) Refuse collection

f) Recycling facilities

g) Local organisations and community groups

h) Environmental technologies installed in the development and dwelling

i) Water conservation / efficiency tips

j) Information on local religious buildings and Parish Council information


Guidance





Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence demonstrates that a non-technical information pack is developed for each dwelling that contains information on at least energy efficiency and water conservation.

2 (Good)

The inclusion of information from points A-J under the developer’s control, but including information on environmental technologies installed in the development and dwelling.

3 (Best) Information is provided in the pack on ALL the information listed A-J.

Please Note: Two Credits can be awarded at the assessors discretion whereby they must justify the exclusion of information deemed not under the developers control.




• There is a commitment by the developer to produce a User Guide that contains the information described under the ‘User Guide Contents’ heading (see additional guidance) that has been developed for both the site and the eventual building. Information on at least energy efficiency and water conservation must be included. The pack information should be made available in a number of different formats so that it is accessible to all (see compliance notes).


Guidance





Two Credits (Good);


2. The inclusion of information under the developer’s control, including information on environmental technologies installed in the development and dwelling must be included.



2. The guide includes areas that are site specific and building specific relevant to the non-technical building user and appropriate to the stakeholder(s) that will occupy the building. In addition information on services provided by other organisations must be included and cover points A-J.


Guidance





Compliance Notes

Operation and Maintenance manual

The presence of O&M manuals does not meet this requirement in its own right. The latter provides the detailed specialist information required by technical Facilities Managers (FMs) and maintenance staff/contractors. The guide can be contained in the Operation & Maintenance (O&M) manual, but must be an extractable or ‘stand alone’ section.

User guide formats

The user guide should be made available for the following groups of society in the following formats.

• Blind and partially sighted people, through the use of audio information, brail, large text;

• People with cognitive impairment through the use of plain English, Makaton, and support services;

• Deaf people and people who are hard of hearing, through facilities for BSL signing, lip reading etc;

• People with mobility, stamina and dexterity impairment through the appropriate location and positioning of information;

• People for whom English is a foreign language, through the use of symbols, audio translation and support services.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

A formal letter from the client / developer confirming the commitment to produce a User Guide for the development:

• That the design team will be required to develop a User Guide for the site.

• The contents of the User Guide will include information on at least energy efficiency and water as minimum requirement.

• User guide formats.

A copy of a summary / outline of the User Guide for the development site including the following:

• Scope of the User Guide’s contents.

• User guide formats.

• Signed by the developer/client or a representative for the development site.

Second Credit

Req. 1


• That the design team will be required to develop a User Guide for the site

• First Credit requirements have been met

• In addition information under the developer’s control must be included.


• Scope of the User Guide’s contents



Guidance





Third Credit

Req. 1


• That the design team will be required to develop a User Guide for the site

• First and Second Credit requirements have been met

• As Good plus information on services provided by other organisations.


• Scope of the User Guide’s contents



Guidance







User Guide Contents

The list below indicates the type of information that should be included to meet the needs of the Facilities Management (FM) Team / Building Manager and the general users (staff).

A. Site / Building Services Information

a) General User: Information on heating, cooling and ventilation on site and the eventual building and how these can be adjusted, e.g. thermostat location and use, implications of covering heating outlets with files, bags etc. and use of lifts and security systems.

b) FM: As above, plus a non-technical summary of the operation and maintenance of the building systems (including BMS if installed) and an overview of controls.

B. Emergency Information

a) Site: Include information on site wide fire muster points, fire fighting systems and nearest emergency services.

b) Building: As above, plus details of location and nature of emergency and fire fighting systems and location of first aid equipment.

C. Energy & Environmental Strategy

This should give owners and occupiers information on energy-efficient features and strategies relating to the site and the building. It should also provide the reasons for their use, e.g. economic and environmental savings. Information could include:

a) Site: Information on the operation of innovative features such as solar panels, CHP, infrastructure and solar gain (e.g. the impact of leaving windows / doors open in an air conditioned office, or use of blinds in winter with respect to solar gain); energy targets and benchmarks for the building type, information on monitoring such as the metering and sub-metering strategy, and how to read, record and present meter readings.


Guidance





D. Water Use

a) Site: details of water saving features and their use and benefits, e.g. SUDS, flooding, leak detection, metering etc. Including background information on the main components (including controls) and operation. Recommendations for system maintenance and its importance, e.g. risk of legionella.

E. Transport Facilities

a) Site: details of car-parking and cycling provision; local public transport information, maps and timetables; information on alternative methods of transport to the workplace, e.g. car sharing schemes; local ‘green’ transport facilities and Information spaces are provided throughout the site.

F. Materials & Waste Policy

a) Site: Information on the location of recyclable materials storage areas and how to use them appropriately. Provide generic information on recycling, including recyclable building / office / fit out components, waste storage and disposal requirements; examples of Waste Management Strategies and any cleaning/maintenance requirements for particular materials and finishes.

G. Reporting Provision

a) General User: Contact details of any site wide manager, maintenance team, and / or helpdesk facility; and details of any building user group if relevant plus contact details of potential suppliers / installers of equipment and services and their areas of responsibility for reporting any subsequent problems.

H. Training

Details of the proposed content and suggested suppliers of any training and / or demonstrations in the use of the site’s services, features and facilities that will be needed.This could include:

a) Training in the use of any innovative/energy saving features.

I. Links & References

This should include links to other information including websites, publications and organisations. In particular, the ‘Carbon Trust’ programme should be referenced and links provided to its website and good practice guidance.


Guidance





J. General

Where further technical detail may be required by the FM Team or manager there should be references to the appropriate sections in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Development (Buildings) Log Book

The Building Regulations Part L requires the provision of a ‘Building Log-Book’ to the owner and/or occupier of the building. In addition on completion, the Construction Design and Management Regulations require the Health and Safety file to be passed onto the building user.

BREEAM requires an additional ‘Building User Guide’ that contains the necessary details about the everyday operation of the development in a form that is easy for the intended users to understand.

Without the provision of adequate information and guidance it is likely that the building will be used inappropriately leading to the dissatisfaction of occupants and wasted resources. For example: Some ventilation and / or lighting systems can be impaired by inappropriate positioning of partitions, office furniture etc. so causing inefficiencies, a lack of comfort and poor performance.

The aim of the credit is to ensure that design features are used efficiently and that changes to office space are managed in the most appropriate manner. For example, the design team of a speculative, open plan office, are likely to have considered the need for meeting or cellular space, and may have provided additional riser or duct space to assist future use. The design of the building may require additional or expanded systems to be installed if occupant levels rise above those designed for. This information should be passed on to the personnel making management decisions, so that they are aware of the implications of such decisions on the management of the building.


Guidance







SE 0.7

SW 1.0

EoE 0.6

WM 0.6

EM 0.6

NW N/A

NE 0.9

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.6


Guidance


COM4 – Management and Operation No National ML ALL



Aim

To ensure that community facilities are maintained and the community has a sense of ownership of them:

• Does the development have provision for community management of facilities, open space, SUDS, grey water schemes, meeting places, allotments etc?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum)

Where evidence demonstrates that the developer will develop AND manage all community scale facilities during the construction phase(s) with procedures in place to allow handover at a set date upon practical completion.

2 (Good)

Where evidence demonstrates that the developer will manage all community scale facilities during the construction phases with procedures in place to allow handover at a set date upon practical completion and that support sources have been identified to help in the initial stages for community management of facilities.

3 (Best) Where evidence demonstrates that a Management structure is in place to form a Community Development Trust (CDT) or management company for the development.




1. There is a commitment from the developer that all community scale facilities will be developed and managed during the construction phases with procedures in place to allow handover at the end of this time.


Guidance





Two Credits (Good);


2. Support sources have been identified to help in the initial stages such as Local Authorities, community groups, community trusts and charities.



2. A Management structure is in place to form a Community Development Trust (CDT) or management company for the development.

Compliance Notes

Community scale facilities

This refers to open space, SUDS, grey water schemes, meeting places, allotments and other areas of public access.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

Confirmation from the design team and contractor to hand over buildings at appropriate stages.

Evidence in the form of the following:

• Written confirmation from the developer to ensure that the construction team conduct a hand over at the appropriate stages.



• Outline construction plan detailing the stages at which each building will be handed over.

Second Credit

Req. 1

Confirmation from the design team and contractor to handover buildings at appropriate stages.






Req. 2 Confirmation of the support sources identified to help in the initial stages for community management of facilities, signed by the developer.

Evidence in the form of written confirmation from the developer on the commitment to implement

Confirmation of the support sources identified to help in the initial stages for community management of facilities, signed by the developer.

Evidence in the form of an implementation plan outlining the support sources and the stage that they will be implemented.


Guidance





support mechanisms during the early stages of hand over.

Third Credit

Req. 1







Req. 2 Confirmation of the support sources identified to help in the initial stages for community management of facilities, signed by the developer.

Evidence in the form of written confirmation from the developer on the commitment to implement support mechanisms during the early stages of hand over.

Confirmation of the support sources identified to help in the initial stages for community management of facilities, signed by the developer.

Evidence in form of an implementation plan outlining the support sources and the stages that they will be implemented.

Req. 3 Letter of commitment from the developer to the Local Authority confirming that a Community Development Trust has been set-up to run the community facilities.

Confirmation from the Local Authority in regards to acceptance of the associated infrastructure after it has been handed over by the developer.

This needs to include the commitment to the Community Development Trust.


Guidance






Chain of Custody: A process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence / path for products and management from developer to consumers.

Community Development Trust: Development trusts are community owned and led organisations that use self-help trading for social purpose, and ownership of buildings and land to bring about long-term social, economic and environmental benefits in their community. They operate in both urban and rural areas, often in neighbourhoods which have experienced the worst economic decline. They are independent, but work with the public sector, private businesses, and other community groups.


Guidance







SE 0.9

SW N/A

EoE 0.9

WM N/A

EM 0.9

NW 0.9

NE 0.8

LON 0.9

Y&H 0.9


Ecology


Guidance

Ecology & Biodiversity Mandatory Status Size Type

ECO1 – Ecological Survey Yes National SML ALL

Ecological Survey


Aim

To determine the ecological value of the habitats in and around the site in order to maintain and enhance biodiversity and protect existing natural habitats:

• Will a full ecological survey be carried out, by a qualified ecologist, to examine habitats in and around the site and migration routes across the site?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum – Mandatory)

An ecological survey has been undertaken by a suitably qualified professional to identify habitats and migration routes and potential damage from proposed development including an explanation of how the benefits outweigh the predicted damage.

2 (Good)

An ecological survey has been undertaken by a suitably qualified professional; a strategy has been drawn up to avoid damage or destruction of ecologically valuable features; where damage or destruction is unavoidable (and this is agreed by the LPA) a mitigation plan to ensure no net loss of features has been prepared.

3 (Best) The first two credits have been achieved PLUS the provision of a Biodiversity Action Plan to ensure the ecological enhancement of the site.




1. Where evidence provided demonstrates that:

a) An ecological survey has been undertaken by a suitably qualified professional to identify habitats and migration routes and potential damage from proposed development including an explanation of how the benefits outweigh the predicted damage.


Guidance



Ecological Survey


Please Note: The report needs to demonstrate how there will be no net loss of ecological value to the site as a result of the proposed development.

Two Credits (Good);



a) A suitably qualified professional (i.e. ecologist) has carried out a full ecological survey of the entire site to identify any ecological features.

b) An ecological strategy has been drawn up by a suitably qualified professional, based on the findings of the ecologist’s report, to avoid damage to any ecological features on site and where this is unavoidable; a mitigation plan has been agreed by the LPA, to ensure there is no net loss of any of the ecological valuable features.




a) A site specific Biodiversity Action Plan has been drawn up, which outlines the steps taken to ensure the ecological enhancement of the site.


Guidance



Ecological Survey


Compliance Notes

1. A suitably qualified ecologist is defined as an individual who:

a) Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject.

b) Is a practising ecologist with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and the built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological impact assessments; Phase 1 and 2 habitat surveys; and habitat restoration.

c) Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.

d) Peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or full members maintain a standard of knowledge or experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics.

e) Full members of the following organisations, who meet the above requirements are deemed to be suitably qualified ecologists:

• Association of the Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC)

• Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM)

• Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM)

• Institute of Environmental management and Assessment (IEMA)

• Landscape Institute (LI).

2. The development site is defined as the whole site up to and including the red line boundary of the proposed development.

3. For a regeneration site assessed at RIBA Stage B (Feasibility). Where all existing features of ecological value are protected, projects will achieve this first credit by default. However, where any existing ecological features are not protected this credit cannot be achieved. Protection includes clear exclusion procedures for construction traffic/personnel and material storage, as well as physical barriers.

4. Where a regeneration site includes new building work or infrastructure, the land on which the new development (including buildings) area and its associated


Guidance



Ecological Survey


infrastructure (e.g. roads, pavements, car parks etc.) will be situated, must comply with the criteria.

5. The suitably qualified ecologist should base their findings on data collected from a site visit conducted at appropriate time(s) of the year when different plant and animal species are evident. The contents of the Ecology Report is to be representative of the existing site’s ecological value immediately prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works (i.e. before RIBA stage K, Operations On Site). Where the ecologist(s) site visit is carried out after commencement of work onsite and after RIBA made no on-site visit, the credit cannot be awarded on the basis of the ecologist’s report.

6. If a suitably qualified ecologist has confirmed a feature has little or no ecological value, for example a diseased or dying tree with a trunk diameter over 100mm, then that feature may be exempt from the protection of ecological features requirements of this credit. This must be based purely on the professional judgement of the ecologist and no other member of the project team.

7. Where the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (refer to Point 1 of design stage compliance requirements above) and where the surrounding site contains no features of ecological value, this credit can be awarded by default.


Guidance



Ecological Survey




First Credit

Req. 1 A copy of the site plan identifying existing ecological features and their location.

A copy of a completed ecological survey report which addresses the following as a minimum:

• identifies habitats and migration routes

• potential damage from proposed development

• an explanation of how the benefits outweigh the predicted damage

• that there is no net loss of ecological value on the site.

Req. 2 Letter / email site plan from the design team confirming:

• Site footprint and vulnerability of existing site ecological features is being protected

• Commitment to ensuring that there is no net loss in regards to the ecological value of the site.

Letter / email from the LPA confirming that they are satisfied with the findings of the ecological survey report.

Second Credit

Req. 1 Written confirmation (letter / email) from the design team confirming:

• Qualifications of the professional carrying out the survey.

• A copy of a completed ecological survey report which demonstrates the following:

• avoiding damage to any ecological features on site

• where this is unavoidable; a


Guidance



Ecological Survey


mitigation plan has been agreed by the LPA

• to ensure there is no net loss of any of the ecological valuable features.


• That an ecological strategy will be draw-up to address the recommendations of the suitably qualified professional.

If applicable a copy of the Mitigation plan signed off by the LPA which ensures that there is no net loss of ecologically valuable features.


• Site footprint and vulnerability of existing site ecological features is being protected

• Commitment to ensuring that there is no net loss in regards to the ecological value of the site.

Third Credit

Req. 1

The first and second Credits have been achieved.

A copy of the site specific Biodiversity Action Plan, which outlines the steps taken to ensure the ecological enhancement of the site.

Req. 2 Appointment of a suitably qualified professional.

Appointment of a suitably qualified professional.


Written confirmation (letter / email) from the design team confirming:

• That a Biodiversity Action Plan will


Guidance



Ecological Survey


• That a Biodiversity Action Plan will be completed that directly addresses the recommendations and findings outlined in the ecological survey report.

be completed that directly addresses the recommendations and findings outlined in the ecological survey report.


Protecting and conservation of ecological features on site from clearing and construction works can have a number of benefits to existing site ecology and subsequent development. Protection ensures that local ‘wild’ areas are sustained and these can influence the type of landscaping selected following construction. Maintaining native species can lead to cost savings through reduced maintenance, reduced risk of liabilities under protection of wildlife legislation, in addition to increasing and maintaining the aesthetic qualities of a development.


Guidance



Ecological Survey




SE 1.0

SW 1.0

EoE 0.8

WM 0.8

EM 1.0

NW 0.9

NE 1.0

LON 0.5

Y&H 1.0


Guidance

Ecology & Biodiversity Mandatory Status Size Regions

ECO2 – Biodiversity Action Plan No National SML ALL

Biodiversity Action Plan


Aim

To improve and strengthen the ecological value of the site and existing habitats:

• Will there be an increase in important, valued or sensitive habitats identified in the Local Biodiversity or Habitat Action Plans (LBAP, BAP, LHAP, HAP) either by area of increased ecological value? (as assessed by a qualified ecologist) or support for a species identified in the Action Plans?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that there is no decrease in important, valued or sensitive habitats.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that there has been an increase of one habitat or species, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that there has been an increase of more than one habitat or species, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.




1. A suitably qualified ecologist(as defined in the Compliance Notes of Eco 1) has determined that there has been no decrease in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site.


Guidance





Two Credits (Good);

1. A suitably qualified ecologist (as defined in the Compliance Notes of Eco 1) has determined that there has been an increase of one in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.


1. A suitably qualified ecologist(as defined in the Compliance Notes of Eco 1) has determined that there has been an increase of more than one in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.

Compliance Notes

1. Only native flora / plant species and those with a known attraction or benefit to local fauna can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number of species on site, as well as general enhancement.

2. Ecological value is measured in plant species. These figures are based on national figures from the Countryside Survey.

3. The contribution of species from a Green roof can only be incorporated where they have been specified by a suitably qualified ecologist.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

Written commitment from the (developer) client / landowner that there will be no decrease in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site.

Copy of Biodiversity Action Plan report providing survey analysis, advice and recommendations required to ensure that there will be no decrease in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site.

Req. 2

Written confirmation from the (developer) client / landowner that the recommendations for general enhancement and protection for site ecology, provided in the BAP report, will be implemented.

Second Credit

Req.1 Written commitment from the (developer) client / landowner that there will be an increase of 1 (one) in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.

Copy of Biodiversity Action Plan report providing survey analysis, advice and recommendations required to ensure that there will be an increase of 1 (one) in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.

Req. 2 Written confirmation from the (developer) client that the recommendations for general enhancement and protection for site ecology, provided in the BAP report, will be implemented.


Guidance





Third Credit

Req.1 Written commitment from the (developer) client / landowner that there will be an increase of more than 1 (one) in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.

Copy of Biodiversity Action Plan report providing survey analysis, advice and recommendations required to ensure that there will be an increase of more than 1 (one) in the number of important, valued or sensitive habitats on site, as identified in the LBAP / BAP or LHAP / HAP.

Req. 2 Written confirmation from the (developer) client that the recommendations for general enhancement and protection for site ecology, provided in the BAP report, will be implemented.


It is recommended that the suitably qualified ecologist is appointed to prepare a report, or to provide verification where the report is prepared by others, at the Feasibility stage (RIBA Stage B) in order to facilitate and maximise potential ecological enhancement.

Development is usually seen as being detrimental to the ecological value of the site. This is often the case but enhancement can also be implemented. Where damage is necessary and unavoidable its effects can be offset to some extent through enhancement in other areas of the site. The steps to be taken will depend on the nature of the site and the surrounding areas, and independent specialised advice should be sought in this respect.


Guidance







SE 0.8

SW 1.0

EoE 0.8

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 0.7

NE 0.9

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.8


Guidance


ECO3 – Native Flora No Regional SML ALL

Native Flora


Aim

To ensure that the trees and shrubs that are specified contribute to the ecological value of the site:

• Has a mixture of locally occurring native trees and shrubs been specified?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 30 - 60% of the trees and shrubs that are specified are native.

2 (Good) Where evidence provided demonstrates that 60 - 90% of the trees and shrubs that are specified are native.

3 (Best) Where evidence provided demonstrates that >90% of the trees and shrubs that are specified are native.




1. The design team confirms, through confirmation with a suitably qualified ecologist, that 30-60% of the plants and shrubs specified for planting on site will be native.

2. A site management plan has been put in place to manage the maintenance needs of the specified flora.


Guidance



Native Flora


Two Credits (Good);

1. The design team confirms, through confirmation with a suitably qualified ecologist, that 60-90% of the plants and shrubs specified for planting on site will be native.

2. A site management plan has been put in place to manage the maintenance needs of the specified flora.

3. The design team, in consultation with the ecologist, incorporates species specified in Local, Regional or National Biodiversity Action Plans.


1. The design team confirms, through confirmation with a suitably qualified ecologist, that greater than 90% of the plants and shrubs specified for planting on site will be native.

2. The design team, with confirmation from the ecologist, research species which are robust to micro climatic conditions and predicted impacts of climate change.

Compliance Notes

1. A Biodiversity Action Plan sets specific, measurable, achievable, and realistic and time bound conservation targets for species and habitats. The UKBAP website www.ukbap.org supports the implementation of the UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP) on behalf of the UK Biodiversity Partnership and the UK Government. Steps to produce a site level BAP are outlined in the UK Business and Biodiversity Resource Centre web-site, hosted by Earthwatch Institute Europe www.businessandbiodiversity.org under ‘your sector’.

2. The percentage of species should be calculated as a percentage of the total number of plants / shrubs / trees / grasses specified within the development.

http://www.ukbap.org

http://www.businessandbiodiversity.org


Guidance



Native Flora




First Credit

Req. 1 • Written confirmation of a commitment from the design team confirming:that any action taken will be in line with the virews of a suitably qualified ecologist

• that 30-60% of the plants and shrubs specified for planting on site will be native.

Extract form the relevant section of the design specification or ecologist report, committing to plant the relevant proportion of native species plants and shrubs.

Req. 2 Written confirmation from the ecologist (suitably qualified professional) that the species are native to the local area.

Written confirmation that a site management plan will be put in place to manage the maintenance needs of the specified flora.

Second Credit

Req.1 Written confirmation of a commitment from the design team confirming:

• that any action taken will be in line with the virews of a suitably qualified ecologist

• that 30-60% of the plants and shrubs specified for planting on site will be native.


Req. 2 Confirmation from the ecologist (suitably qualified professional) that the species chosen for planting are specified in Local, Regional or National Biodiversity Action Plans.

Details of the species chosen.


Guidance



Native Flora


Third Credit

Req. 1 Written confirmation of a commitment from the design team confirming:

• that any action taken will be in line with the virews of a suitably qualified ecologist

• that greater than 90% of the plants and shrubs specified for planting on site will be native.


Reference is also made to resilient plant species and these are incorporated within the planting scheme / specification.

Req.2 Copy of the report from the ecologist (or suitably qualified professional) outlining the research carried out into more robust species, or justification for why the ecologist has recommended these species.

As at Outline Planning Stage.




Guidance



Native Flora




SE 0.6

SW 0.9

EoE 0.6

WM 0.8

EM 0.8

NW 0.9

NE 1.0

LON 0.5

Y&H 1.0


Guidance

Ecology Mandatory Status Size Type

ECO4 - Wildlife Corridors No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

Wildlife Corridors


Aim

To improve the ecological value of the site and support the viability of species by linking populations and habitats.

• Will existing wildlife corridors be protected and new ones created (with specific reference to the Local Biodiversity Action Plan) to link habitats within the site or link to habitats outside the development with evidence provided that long term effectiveness of proposals has been considered and addressed?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Creating or securing links for the most important LBAP habitats and species using linear features, e.g. hedges, ditches and tree lines or strips of other local habitat.

2 (Good)

The First Credit has been achieved

PLUS

Optimising all potential links for LBAP species and habitats as far as possible within the curtiledge of the development.

3 (Best)

The First and Second Credits have been achieved

PLUS

The development provides clear links to existing green corridors / areas beyond the site boundary OR links to areas covered by a conservation plan.

Please Note: reference MUST be made to the LBAP to ensure that measures adopted on site are of local ecological benefit.


Guidance



Wildlife Corridors





• Site plans clearly marking linear features that link habitats and species.

AND

• Reference to the relevant features and species in the ecologist and / or landscape architects report.

Two Credits (Good);


AND

2. Reference within the ecologist and / or landscape architects report to the relevant requirements of the species contained within the LBAP.


1. Good has been achieved.

AND

2. The development provides links to existing green corridors / green areas.

AND / OR

3. The site links, through green corridors or green space on site, to areas covered by a conservation plan.


Guidance



Wildlife Corridors


Compliance Notes

Existing Features Existing features, i.e. hedgerows / ditches can demonstrate compliance with this credit where the ecologist report makes reference to them. These features must be protected during the construction phase of the development.

Existing green corridors

Further to the above, should the ecologist and / or landscape architect identify existing corridors located on the development site then these can contribute to first credit ONLY where they are protected through the construction phase.

Existing green areas

Existing green areas should be identified either in a local plan or be covered by a conservation plan (or equivalent). Where the specific green area contains ONLY sports pitches and has no specific function beyond recreation please contact BRE Global as to whether this can contribute to this Credit.


Guidance



Wildlife Corridors




First Credit

Req. 1

• Site plans clearly demonstrating green corridors within the development plan


PLUS

• Relevant sections of the design guide / ecologist report that identify features and how they will be incorporated within the development.

Req. 2

• Relevant section from an ecologist report indicating linear features and the species that these are of benefit to in the LBAP.

Second Credit

Req. 1


Req. 2

• Marked up site plans showing that features are contained within the site boundary and do not extend beyond.

• Final masterplans (and potential site photographs) clearly showing features within the site boundary.

*Where existing features are to be protected details of the feature and the protection measures adopted during the construction phase MUST be provided.

Third Credit

Req. 1



Req. 2

• Site plans with green corridors within the site boundary with clearly marked links to green corridors


Guidance



Wildlife Corridors


beyond the site.

Req. 3

• Site plans with green corridors within the site boundary clearly linked to green areas beyond the site boundary.

• Details of features beyond the site boundary and marked up site plans / drawings clearly demonstrating how green areas on the development site link to those beyond the boundary

• Relevant sections of ecologist report and landscape design features that provide these links.


Where the development site is linking to green areas beyond the site boundary this should be as clear as possible. Where links are broken by infrastructure (such as roads) the views of the ecologist must be sought as to whether this will be a barrier to migration routes.


Guidance



Wildlife Corridors




SE 0.8

SW 1.0

EoE 0.7

WM 0.8

EM 0.8

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON N/A

Y&H 0.9


Business


Guidance

Business Mandatory Status Size Type BUS1 – Business Priority

Sectors No National SML ALL

Business Investment


Aim

To promote business growth within regionally prioritised sectors:

• Will the development be designed to suit the needs of prioritised business sectors as identified by a Local Enterprise Partnership)?

Please Note: Reference and consultation needs to be made with the Local Planning Authority for this particular credit and the classification of the ‘priority business sectors’.

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum)

• Where evidence provided demonstrates that: an assessment of likely tenants and business types / sectors that will occupy non-residential units has been completed

• an assessment of the services required by the likely tenants and business types / sectors has been completed.

2 (Good)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that:

• there will be at least one priority business sector introduced through the proposed development

• an assessment of likely tenants and business types / sectors that will occupy non-residential units has been completed



Guidance



Business Investment


3 (Best)

Where evidence provided demonstrates that:

• there will be more than one priority business sector introduced through the proposed development

• an assessment of likely tenants and business types / sectors that will occupy non-residential units has been completed


Please Note: where a Local Enterprise Partnership is yet to be formed or has not identified the key factors for economic growth assessors should refer to the Regional Economic Statement developed for the region, or locally specific Economic Development Strategy (or equivalent).




1. A feasibility study (or investigation report) has been carried out and as a minimum has examined and addressed the following:

a) Local Enetrrpsie Partnership priorities (Regional Economic Strategy or equivalent)

b) Business occupancy of the development

c) Services and facilities required

d) Location of business occupants

e) Local zoning planning requirements

2. Provide a copy of the master plan highlighting the location and areas set aside for likely tenants and business types / sectors.

Two Credits (Good);



Guidance



Business Investment


2. Additional information that demonstrates:

a) There will be at least one priority business sector introduced through the proposed development.



2. Additional information that demonstrates that:

a) There will be at more than priority business sector introduced through the proposed development.

Compliance Notes

Local Enterprise Partnership (LEP)

Replacement for RES’s formed by local councils and local businesses to drive sustainable economic growth at a local level.

Regional Economic Statement

Whilst BRE Global recognise the abolition of the regions, where there is no formally recognised LEP we will allow reference to previous RES’s or Local Planning Authority recognised equivalent statement for economic growth.

Please Note: where a LEP has issued a revised local strategy this will take precedent over a revoked RES.


Guidance



Business Investment




First Credit

Req. 1 Confirmation that the developer has consulted with the LPA in regards to the non-domestic components of the development:

• including identification of key business sectors for the local area.

A copy of the feasibility study that was undertaken signed by the developer and / or the project team.

Note: It must address the issues raised within the outline feasibility study and the LPA consultation.

Req. 2 Written confirmation that a feasibility study will be completed – it must include:

• Outline of the key issues the feasibility study will address.

• Reference to the local / regional economic policy guidance (such as guidance from the LEP – or equivalent).

A marked up copy of the development site master plan identifying the location allocated for non-residential occupancy.

Second Credit

Req. 1 The First Credit requirements have been achieved.

The First Credit requirements have been achieved.

Req. 2 Written confirmation that indicates that there will be more than one ‘priority business sector’ introduced by the development.

A marked up copy of the development site master plan identifying the location allocated for non-residential occupancy. It must demonstrate the location and the type of tenants that spaces will be made available for as a result of the development.


Guidance



Business Investment


Third Credit

Req. 1 The First and Second Credit requirements have been achieved.

The First and Second Credit requirements have been achieved.

Req. 2 Written confirmation that indicates that there will be at least one ‘priority business sector’ introduced by the development.

A marked up copy of the development site master plan identifying the location allocated for non-residential occupancy. It must demonstrate the location and types of tenants that spaces will be made available for as a result of the development.


Guidance



Business Investment



RES: Regional Economic Strategy Local Enterprise Partnership (LEP): established to identify the requirements for local economic growth following the removal of RSS. www.communities.gov.uk/news/newsroom/1753574

Priority Business Sectors: are business sectors within the regional area that have been highlighted for improvement to provide a balanced economy.

Regional Economic Strategies provide an outline for building a strong, stable and sustainable economy which provides prosperity and opportunities for all, and in which environmental and social costs fall on those who impose them and efficient resource use is incentivised.

For example the Northwest Regional Economic Strategy identifies three major drivers:

1. Improving productivity and market growth

• Increasing the number of higher added value jobs in the region, as well as retaining existing high-value jobs through investment in innovation, research and leadership.

2. Growing the size and capability of the workforce

• Getting more people into work, especially in the region’s most deprived areas, among its most disadvantaged communities and areas remote from growth.

3. Creating the right conditions for sustainable growth and private sector investment

• Through investing in the region’s environment, culture, infrastructure and communities.

Where these have been removed and a LEP has proposed new requirements these should be taken into account. Where the Regional Economic Strategy has been revoked but not yet replaced it should be used in the interim.

http://www.communities.gov.uk/news/newsroom/1753574


Guidance



Business Investment




SE 0.7

SW 1.0

WM 0.7

EoE 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.8

NE N/A

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance

Business Mandatory Status Size Type

BUS2 – Labour and Skills No National SML ALL

Employment


Aim

To ensure that the development contributes to regeneration initiatives:

• Will the developers and / or contractors engage local labour?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Where evidence is provided that the developer has engaged local labour and / or subcontractors on a temporary basis.

2 (Good) Where evidence is provided that the developer has engaged local labour and / or subcontractors on a permanent basis.

3 (Best) Where evidence is provided that the developer has worked with local training providers to build local skills base and capacity within the local area.




1. Provide evidence that local labour and / or local contractors (including sub-contractors) will be used during the construction phase of the development.

Two Credits (Good);

1. The requirements of the first credit are achieved.

2. Provide evidence that local labour and / or local contractors (including sub-contractors) will be used during the ongoing maintenance and operation of the development (post construction).


Guidance



Employment



1. The requirements of the first two credits have been achieved.

2. Provide evidence that the developer has engaged with local training providers such as, Learning Skills Centres and Higher Education providers to build local skills base and capacity within the local area.

Compliance Notes

Local As a guide 'Local' distance was defined by BioRegional when reporting on local sourcing distances as 35miles.

Temporary Construction jobs for up to 1 year during project timescale.

Training Providers Defined as institutions which provide training and accreditation of skilled labour that can be utilised at / on the development site.

This can be both construction jobs and also professional jobs that will be provided when the development is completed.


Guidance



Employment




First Credit

Req. 1 Documentation that provides details outlining where the labour, sub-contractors and contractors will be sourced.

Documentation that commits the developer and project team to the utilisation of locally sourced labour during the construction phase (or on a Temporary basis for the specific project).

Second Credit

Req. 1 The first credit has been achieved.

Req. 2 Documentation that commits the developer and project team to the utilisation of locally sourced labour on a Permanent Basis (during both the construction and operational phase).

Documentation that commits the developer and project team to the utilisation of locally sourced labour on a Permanent Basis (during both the construction and operational phase).

Third Credit


Req. 2 Written correspondence from a training provider confirming arrangements for ongoing training and education of local labour and sub-contactors for the development.

Copy of an agreement letter from training provider confirming arrangements for ongoing training and education of local labour and sub-contactors for the development.


Guidance



Employment



It is important for construction projects to generate opportunities for a range of age groups, skills and technical abilities. The success of these developments relies upon finding the right employees.

The aim of this credit is to ensure that valuable work experiences are provided, enabling trainees to progress either within the company or in another organisation.

Glossary of Terms

Local: defined as a maximum distance from the site of 35miles. Contractors / sub-contractors should live / be employed by organisations within the 35 mile limit.

Temporary: construction jobs for up to 1 year during project timescale.

Permanent: jobs created and expected to be in existence beyond project timescales (apprenticeships / training).

PPP: Private Public Partnerships.


Guidance



Employment




SE N/A

SW N/A

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

EoE 0.6

NW 0.7

NE N/A

LON N/A

Y&H 0.6


Guidance


BUS3 – Employment No Regional ML ALL

Employment


Aim

To create additional permanent jobs within the local area:

• What is the potential for the development to create additional permanent jobs either through new business or for maintenance of the development?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) There will be no decrease in the number of permanent jobs within the local area as a direct result of the project.

2 (Good) There will be a net % increase in the number of jobs in the local area.

3 (Best) A net increase in jobs that draw upon the local skills base or where training opportunities will be provided to help local workers to up skill.




1. An economic study (or investigation report) has been carried out, and has examined and addressed the following:

a) Business in Existing Area

b) Employment Rates (Unemployment Rates)

c) Location of Business Types (Existing & Proposed)

d) Provision of Facilities (Services and infrastructure).


Guidance



Employment


2. Provide a map of the local surrounding area highlighting the potential copy of the master plan highlighting the location and areas set aside for likely tenants and business types / sectors.

Please Note: Reference to the RES and consultation with the Local Planning Authority’s Economic Development Department (or equivalent) will provide details on specific employment requirements.

Two Credits (Good);

1. As for the first credit PLUS:

2. Evidence that demonstrate that the development will have a positive net gain on employment opportunities through the region and local area.


1. As for the first credit PLUS:

2. Documentation that demonstrates an alliance with a local training provider – could include (but not limited to):

a) Universities

b) Higher Educational Institutions

c) Apprentice Schemes (or equivalent).


Guidance



Employment


Compliance Notes

Compliance notes

Employment Where the development is on a site that had no prior economic activity then two Credits can be awarded by default where jobs are created as a result of the development.

Equivalent Standards

Under localism compliance can be demonstrated with this credit where a LEP (or equivalent) demonstrates that additional job creation is relevant to the local context.


Guidance



Employment




First Credit

Req. 1 Copy of a map of the surrounding area that highlights the existing business types and the new proposed business types (complementary employment opportunities).

Copy of an economic study (or equivalent) that outlines and addresses the credit criteria as set out within the compliance requirements for this issue.

Second Credit

Req. 1 The first credit has been achieved.

Req. 2 Written confirmation from the developer on the type of economic impact that the development will have:

• A commitment to achieve a net positive growth in employment.

Within the copy of the economic study (or equivalent) additional information that demonstrates that:

• The development will have a positive net gain on employment opportunities through the region and local area.

Third Credit



Guidance



Employment


Req. 2 Copy of a letter that demonstrates a commitment from the developer to partner with a training provider outlining that the ‘new’ proposed business (non-domestic buildings) and it employees will have training opportunities.

Copy of a written agreement or equivalent documentation that demonstrates a commitment from the developer to partner with a training provider and outlining that the ‘new’ proposed business (non-domestic buildings) and it employees will have training opportunities.


Local: as a guide 'Local' distance was defined by BioRegional when reporting on local sourcing distances as 35miles.

Temporary: construction jobs for up to 1 year during project timescale.

Permanent: jobs created and expected to be in existence beyond project timescales (apprenticeships / training).


Guidance



Employment




SE 0.9

SW N/A

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 1.0

NE 1.0

LON 0.9

Y&H 1.0


Guidance


BUS4 – New Business No National SML Mixed

Business Facilities


Aim

That new business space should complement and enhance those businesses already in the local area:

• Will new business space increase / maintain the viability of existing businesses?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) An assessment is carried out to identify what the current businesses are and what would complement their activities.

2 (Good) Committed anchor tenant with complementary business to those existing in the area is identified.

3 (Best)

Economic study shows that facilities will meet the needs of existing businesses in the area.

AND

That various facilities for a range of business sizes have been provided with the ability for businesses to growth and develop




1. An assessment report (or equivalent) of the existing businesses and surrounding economy has been carried out and has examined and addressed the following:

a) Business in Existing Area

b) Employment Rates (Unemployment Rates)

c) Location of Business Types (Existing & Proposed)


Guidance



Business Facilities


d) Provision of Facilities (Services and infrastructure).

2. Provide a copy of a local map of the area surrounding the development highlighting the types of existing business units.

Two Credits (Good);


1. Additional information demonstrates that a ‘core’ anchor tenant has made a commitment to the development.

a) Documentation needs to be in writing along the lines of a contract or a letter of commitment (or equivalent) that demonstrates the commitment of an ‘anchor tenant’.



1. Additional work in the form of an Economic Study (or equivalent) that demonstrates that the facilities within the proposed development will meet the needs (complement) of existing business in the area.

Compliance Notes

Anchor Tennant An anchor tenant is defined as someone who has committed to purchase / rent space within the new development for commercial purposes. Evidence should be in the form of legal contracts / written agreements.


Guidance



Business Facilities




First Credit

Req. 1 Copy of a map which outline the land-use boundaries surrounding the proposed development.

Copy of a map of the surrounding area that highlights the existing business types within close proximity to the proposed development.

Req. 2 Copy of an assessment (or equivalent) that outlines and addresses the credit criteria as set out within the compliance requirements for this issue:

1. Business in Existing Area

2. Employment Rates (Unemployment Rates)

3. Location of Business Types (Existing & Proposed)

4. Provision of Facilities (Services and infrastructure).

Copy of an outline of the assessment which provides a summary of the following areas that will be addressed:

1. Business in Existing Area

2. Employment Rates (Unemployment Rates)

3. Location of Business Types (Existing & Proposed)

4. Provision of Facilities (Services and infrastructure).

Second Credit

Req. 1 The First Credit has been achieved.


Req. 2 Copy of a letter (or equivalent documentation) that demonstrates a commitment from the developer and an anchor tenant to locating their business within the proposed development.

Copy of a letter of agreement (could be in the form of a lease agreement or equivalent) that demonstrates a commitment from the developer and an anchor tenant to locating their business within the proposed development.


Guidance



Business Facilities


Third Credit



Req. 2 Copy of an outline of the details that will be addressed within an Economic Study on the infrastructure and proposed development in relation to the existing business community in the local area.

Copy of an Economic Study that demonstrates that the infrastructure and facilities of the proposed development will complement and meet the needs of the existing business in the local area.




Guidance



Business Facilities




SE N/A

SW 1.0

EoE 0.8

WM 0.8

EM 1.0

NW 0.9

NE 1.0

LON N/A

Y&H 0.8


Guidance


BUS5 – Investment No National SML Mixed

Business Facilities


Aim

To attract inward investment from businesses and organisations from outside the immediate area to increase economic well being:

• Will the development be designed to attract inward investment?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum) Equivalent unoccupied units are not present in the locality.

2 (Good) Demonstrated unmet demand.

3 (Best) Identified occupiers.

Please Note: If a mixture of Good and Best practice then if more than 30% of units 'identified occupiers' then assessors can award the Best practice credit.




1. Completion of an economic study which clearly identifies the following requirements:

a) Occupied Units within the local area.

b) Unoccupied Units within the local area.


Guidance



Business Facilities


Two Credits (Good);


a) Demonstrated unmet demand for investment from outside the local area.

b) Specific business types that match up with that identified demand.



a) Signed up business occupiers within the non-domestic units that specifically match up with the identified demand.

Compliance Notes

Economic Study The economic study must focus on the priorities of the LEP. Where a LEP is yet to be formalised then the economic study should focus on the priorities of the last published version of the relevant RSS.


Guidance



Business Facilities




First Credit

Req. 1 Copy of a summary of an economic study (or equivalent) that it will identify (or list) the following requirements:

• Occupied Units within local area

• Unoccupied Units within local area.

Copy of an economic study (or equivalent) that outlines and highlights the following requirements:

• Occupied Units within local area

• Unoccupied Units within local area.

Second Credit

Req. 1 The First Credit has been achieved.


Req. 2 Copy of a summary of an economic study (or equivalent) that it will identify (or list) the following requirements:

• Demonstrated unmet demand for investment from outside the local area.

Details within the economic study (or equivalent) highlights the following:

• Demonstrated unmet demand for investment from outside the local area.

• Specific business types that match up with that identified demand.

Third Credit




Guidance



Business Facilities


Req. 2 Letter (or equivalent) from businesses within the local area who are interested in signing up to occupy the new non-domestic units within the proposed development.

Contract (or equivalent) from businesses within the local area which have signed up to occupy the new non-domestic units within the proposed development.


Development Plans, Local Development Frameworks, Local Transport Plans and economic development strategies should support the continued regeneration of key areas specified within the RSS (or where superseded by a LEP), it must ensure that any development maintains and strengthens the economic, commercial and cultural roles of these key areas identified by the region, or for the specific area covered by a LEP.


Guidance



Business Facilities




SE 0.7

SW N/A

EoE 1.0

WM 1.0

EM 0.9

NW 0.9

NE N/A

LON 0.7

Y&H 1.0


Buildings


Guidance

Buildings Mandatory Status Size Type

BLD1 – Domestic Yes National SML ALL

Code for Sustainable Homes


Aim

To ensure that all buildings within the development are assessed under the appropriate Code for Sustainable Homes rating:

• What Code Level (or equivalent) will be achieved for the proposed buildings?

Assessment Criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum –

Mandatory) Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all domestic buildings to achieve a rating of Code for Sustainable Homes Level 3 Rating.

2 (Good) Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all domestic buildings to achieve a rating of Code for Sustainable Homes Level 4 Rating.

3 (Best) Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all domestic buildings to achieve a rating of Code for Sustainable Homes Level 5 Rating (or above).

Please Note: for development sites where different Code levels are being delivered BRE Global adopts a worst case scenario, based on the percentage of homes reaching the lowest Code level. If in doubt when undertaking an assessment please contact BRE Global.

For projects with NO RESIDENTIAL development this credit can be removed from the assessment criteria. Please contact BRE Global for an assessment template ([email protected]).



Guidance







One credit (Minimum – Mandatory);

• To provide a design statement showing that all buildings within the development will have a rating of the following (or equivalent):

o Code: Level 3

Two Credits (Good);


o Code: Level 4



o Code: Level 5 (or above)


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1

Marked up plans showing buildings classification and assessment type:

• Domestic

• Apartments

• Detached Dwellings

• Other.

Note: Must account for every building on site that fits into the above classification categories.


• Domestic

• Apartments

• Detached Dwellings

• Other.


Req. 2

Written commitment from the developers to delivering the levels sought for individual buildings.

Meeting the requirements to achieve the Code Level 3.

Commitment from the design team to make sure that levels sought for individual buildings are delivered – outline the stages of development that the buildings will be assessed:

• Design Stage

• Post Construction

• Management and Operation.

Req. 3

Copy of Section 106 Agreement which outlines the commitment from the developer and an agreement with the Local Planning Authority to deliver the Code (or equivalent) ratings on all buildings.


Guidance





Second Credit

Req. 1

As for the First Credit.

• Meeting the requirements to achieve the Code Level 4.



Third Credit

Req. 1






Code for Sustainable Homes: A mandatory measure of the sustainability of new homes in England replaces the EcoHomes scheme, developed by the Building Research Establishment (BRE).

EcoHomes: A domestic version of BREEAM. It provides an authoritative rating for new, converted or renovated homes, and covers houses, flats and apartments. It is presently used in Scotland.


Guidance







SE 0.8

SW 1.0

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.8

NE 1.0

LON 0.7

Y&H 1.0


Guidance





Aim

To ensure that all buildings within the development are assessed under the appropriate BREEAM rating:

• What BREEAM Rating (or equivalent) will be achieved for the proposed buildings?

Credit criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum -

Mandatory) Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all non-domestic buildings to achieve a rating of BREEAM Good .

2 (Good) Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all non-domestic buildings to achieve a rating of BREEAM Very Good.

3 (Best) Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all non-domestic buildings to achieve a rating of BREEAM Excellent or above.

Please Note: for non-domestic buildings BRE Global adopts a ‘worst case’ scenario for all buildings, i.e. if there are two BREEAM ‘Excellent’ Buildings and one BREEAM ‘Good’ Building one credit should be awarded.

BREEAM multi-residential is, for the purposes of this Credit, considered a non-domestic assessment scheme.



One Credit (Minimum – Mandatory);


• BREEAM Schemes: Good.


Guidance





Two Credits (Good);


• BREEAM Schemes: Very Good.



• BREEAM Schemes: Excellent (or above).

Please Note: where a core BREEAM scheme is not being used, assessors MUST gain written confirmation from BRE Global that an assessment scheme is considered equivalent prior to submitting their assessment report for Quality Assurance.


Guidance







First Credit

Req. 1


• Non-domestic

o Offices / Retail / Industrial

o Education / Healthcare

o Other (Bespoke).



• Non-domestic



o Other (Bespoke).


Req. 2

Written commitment from the developers to delivering the levels sought for individual buildings.

Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Good rating.


• Design Stage



Req. 3

Copy of Section 106 Agreement which outlines the commitment from the developer and an agreement with the Local Planning Authority to deliver the BREEAM (or equivalent) ratings on all buildings.


Guidance





Second Credit

Req. 1


• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Very Good rating.


• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Very Good rating.

Third Credit

Req. 1

As for the First Credit:

• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Excellent (or above) rating.

As for the First Credit:

• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Excellent (or above) rating.


BREEAM: BRE’s Environmental Assessment method) is a third party assessment methodology for buildings. It sets the standards for best practice in sustainable development and demonstrates a level of achievement.


Guidance







SE 0.8

SW 0.8

EoE 0.5

WM 1.0

EM 1.0

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Guidance

Buildings Mandatory Status Size Type BLD3 – Building Refurbishment No Bespoke Bespoke Bespoke

BREEAM (or equivalent)


Aim

To ensure that all retained buildings that are to be refurbished within the development are assessed under the appropriate BREEAM rating to increase their sustainability:

• What BREEAM Rating (or equivalent) will be achieved for retained existing buildings?

Assessment criteria

Credits

1 (Minimum)

• Where evidence demonstrates that there is a commitment for all non-domestic refurbished buildings to achieve a rating of BREEAM Refurbishment Pass.

• Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all domestic refurbished buildings to achieve a rating of: Pass

2 (Good)

• Where evidence demonstrates that there is a commitment for all non-domestic refurbished buildings to achieve a rating of BREEAM Refurbishment Good.

• Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all domestic refurbished buildings to achieve a rating of: Good

3 (Best)

• Where evidence demonstrates that there is a commitment for all non-domestic refurbished buildings to achieve a rating of BREEAM Refurbishment Very Good or above.

• Where evidence demonstrates there is a commitment for all domestic refurbished buildings to achieve a rating of: Excellent

Please Note: For the purposes of this credit ALL BREEAM Buildings refurbishment assessment criteria apply to non-domestic buildings. For domestic buildings BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment apply.

For part retained buildings please contact BRE Global to discuss the requirements of the project ([email protected]).



Guidance







• To provide a design statement showing that all existing, retained buildings within the development will have a rating of the following (or equivalent):

• BREEAM Refurbishment Criteria: Pass.

• BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment: Pass

Two Credits (Good);


• BREEAM Refurbishment Criteria: Good.

• BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment: Good

Three Credit (Best);


• BREEAM Refurbishment Criteria: Very Good (or above).

• BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment: Very Good (or above).

Please Note: where a core BREEAM scheme is not being used, assessors MUST gain written confirmation from BRE Global that an assessment scheme is considered equivalent prior to submitting their assessment report for Quality Assurance.


Guidance




Compliance Notes

BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment

Designed to enable the sustainable refurbishment of existing housing titled BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment. The standard aims to provide a single standard in order to assess the environmental performance of housing refurbishment works. Further information can be found at: www.breeam.org/page.jsp?id=228

BREEAM Refurbishment

The standards for BREEAM Refurbishment are set one level lower than the new building standards to support the retaining of buildings.

Where the developer is undertaking a major refurbishment they should refer to BREEAM 2011. For smaller refurbishment projects developers should refer to BREEAM 2008. Please contact BRE Global should you need further information on which scheme to apply: [email protected]

BREEAM In Use Where buildings are retained AND NOT refurbished One Credit can be awarded where the developer has committed to undertake a BREEAM In Use assessment of the asset / building.




Guidance






First Credit

Req. 1

Marked up plans showing existing building(s) on site and their classification and assessment type:

• Non-domestic



o Other (Bespoke).

• Domestic.

Note: Must account for every building on site that fits into the above classification categories that is being retained as part of the new development.


• Non-domestic



o Other (Bespoke).

• Domestic.

Note: Must account for every building on site that fits into the above classification categories that is being retained as part of the new development.

Req. 2

Written commitment from the developers to delivering the levels sought for individual building(s).

Meeting the requirements to achieve the required building level assessment rating.


• Design Stage




Guidance




Req. 3

If conducted, initial audit reports that detail how the building is to be refurbished and the relevant score that this will achieve against the specified scheme.

Second Credit

Req. 1


• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Good rating.


• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Good rating.

Req. 2


• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment Good rating.


• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment Good rating.

Third Credit

Req. 1


• Meeting the requirements to achieve the BREEAM Very Good (or above) rating.



Req. 2






Guidance





BREEAM: BRE’s Environmental Assessment method) is a third party assessment methodology for buildings. It sets the standards for best practice in sustainable development and demonstrates a level of achievement.

BREEAM Domestic Refurbishment: recently launched, the Code relates to the refurbishment of non-domestic buildings.


Guidance






SE 0.7

SW 0.7

EoE 0.7

WM 0.7

EM 0.7

NW 0.7

NE 0.7

LON 0.7

Y&H 0.7


Innovation


Issue ID Issue Title

No. of available percentage points

Minimum Standards

Inn01 - 10 Innovation 10 No

Aim

To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits which are not rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.

Assessment Criteria

The following demonstrates compliance: Up to a maximum of 10 credits (equivalent to 1% point PER Credit) are available in aggregate from a combination of the following: Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues 1. Where the building / development demonstrates exemplary performance by

meeting defined exemplary level performance criteria in one or more of the BREEAM Communities assessment issues.

2. One innovation credit (one percentage point) can be awarded for each individual BREEAM issue exemplary performance level complied with.

Approved Innovations

1. One innovation credit (1%) can be awarded for each innovation application

approved by BRE Global, where the building complies with the criteria defined within an Approved Innovation application form.


Compliance Notes Exemplary level of performance

Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues to ascertain exemplary performance levels.

Applying for Innovation credits

Any new technology, design or construction method or process can potentially be recognised as ‘innovative’, provided it demonstrates it meets the BREEAM eligibility criteria for Innovation credits. Applications for innovations can be submitted to BRE Global by Licensed BREEAM Assessors using the formal Innovation Application Form. BREEAM Assessors can obtain the application form from BRE Global or via the BREEAM Assessor Extranet. Relevant details of the BREEAM Innovation application and approval process, application fees, innovation credit eligibility criteria and details of previously approved innovations are available separately from the BREEAM Assessor Extranet and BRE Global.


Req. Outline Planning Stage Detailed Planning Stage 1 As defined within existing BREEAM

Issues. As defined within existing BREEAM Issues.

2-4 A copy of the Approved Innovation application or confirmation of the Approved Innovation reference number. AND Relevant documentary evidence demonstrating specification of the approved innovation.

As Design stage AND Relevant documentary evidence confirming that the project has achieved/installed the approved innovation as described and quantified within the approved innovation application form.


Approved Innovation: Any technology, method or process that can be shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building’s / developments design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition, and which is approved as innovative by BRE Global.


End of Manual.